TW200400540A - Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method - Google Patents
Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TW200400540A TW200400540A TW92104373A TW92104373A TW200400540A TW 200400540 A TW200400540 A TW 200400540A TW 92104373 A TW92104373 A TW 92104373A TW 92104373 A TW92104373 A TW 92104373A TW 200400540 A TW200400540 A TW 200400540A
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- optical system
- image
- projection optical
- pattern
- line
- Prior art date
Links
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 558
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims description 380
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 title claims description 80
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 title claims description 49
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 352
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 claims description 206
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 122
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 116
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 claims description 87
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims description 81
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 claims description 63
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims description 51
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 claims description 49
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 claims description 40
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 claims description 14
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 11
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 238000001459 lithography Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 claims description 7
- 208000027418 Wounds and injury Diseases 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000012854 evaluation process Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 claims description 5
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 claims description 3
- 208000014674 injury Diseases 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000002023 wood Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000004744 fabric Substances 0.000 claims description 2
- 235000010627 Phaseolus vulgaris Nutrition 0.000 claims 1
- 244000046052 Phaseolus vulgaris Species 0.000 claims 1
- 206010039509 Scab Diseases 0.000 claims 1
- 210000003423 ankle Anatomy 0.000 claims 1
- VJBCNMFKFZIXHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N azanium;2-(4-methyl-5-oxo-4-propan-2-yl-1h-imidazol-2-yl)quinoline-3-carboxylate Chemical compound N.N1C(=O)C(C(C)C)(C)N=C1C1=NC2=CC=CC=C2C=C1C(O)=O VJBCNMFKFZIXHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims 1
- FFBHFFJDDLITSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl N-[2-hydroxy-4-(3-oxomorpholin-4-yl)phenyl]carbamate Chemical compound OC1=C(NC(=O)OCC2=CC=CC=C2)C=CC(=C1)N1CCOCC1=O FFBHFFJDDLITSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims 1
- 238000009933 burial Methods 0.000 claims 1
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 claims 1
- 239000013072 incoming material Substances 0.000 claims 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 claims 1
- 201000009310 astigmatism Diseases 0.000 abstract description 6
- 235000012431 wafers Nutrition 0.000 description 133
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 67
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 51
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 42
- 210000001747 pupil Anatomy 0.000 description 30
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 27
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 21
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 21
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 20
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 12
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000007493 shaping process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 101150118300 cos gene Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 5
- NAWXUBYGYWOOIX-SFHVURJKSA-N (2s)-2-[[4-[2-(2,4-diaminoquinazolin-6-yl)ethyl]benzoyl]amino]-4-methylidenepentanedioic acid Chemical compound C1=CC2=NC(N)=NC(N)=C2C=C1CCC1=CC=C(C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(=C)C(O)=O)C(O)=O)C=C1 NAWXUBYGYWOOIX-SFHVURJKSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 206010010071 Coma Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 101100333273 Phytophthora parasitica PARA1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 4
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium difluoride Chemical compound [F-].[F-].[Ca+2] WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 3
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000010436 fluorite Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012805 post-processing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 3
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon dioxide Inorganic materials O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 3
- 101100042630 Caenorhabditis elegans sin-3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101100234408 Danio rerio kif7 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101100221620 Drosophila melanogaster cos gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910052693 Europium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Fluoride anion Chemical compound [F-] KRHYYFGTRYWZRS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 244000269722 Thea sinensis Species 0.000 description 2
- 206010052428 Wound Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 101100398237 Xenopus tropicalis kif11 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003749 cleanliness Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002019 doping agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- OGPBJKLSAFTDLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N europium atom Chemical compound [Eu] OGPBJKLSAFTDLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000000691 measurement method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007781 pre-processing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000035807 sensation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002689 soil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001179 sorption measurement Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 244000005894 Albizia lebbeck Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100439211 Caenorhabditis elegans cex-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100036570 Coiled-coil domain-containing protein 177 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101000715214 Homo sapiens Coiled-coil domain-containing protein 177 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100220214 Mus musculus Cdx4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010029412 Nightmare Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010073261 Ovarian theca cell tumour Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241001520808 Panicum virgatum Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000282376 Panthera tigris Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000276498 Pollachius virens Species 0.000 description 1
- 244000018633 Prunus armeniaca Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000009827 Prunus armeniaca Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101150109831 SIN4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010041235 Snoring Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910000831 Steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052769 Ytterbium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032683 aging Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003050 axon Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052797 bismuth Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- JCXGWMGPZLAOME-UHFFFAOYSA-N bismuth atom Chemical compound [Bi] JCXGWMGPZLAOME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000739 chaotic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001427 coherent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002425 crystallisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008025 crystallization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009795 derivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005611 electricity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012467 final product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003128 head Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000000265 homogenisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004615 ingredient Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011835 investigation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005468 ion implantation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000010985 leather Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 1
- QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercury Chemical compound [Hg] QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052753 mercury Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000003278 mimic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012858 packaging process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003504 photosensitizing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012887 quadratic function Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007261 regionalization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008439 repair process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004576 sand Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001568 sexual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011257 shell material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010025 steaming Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000010959 steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004575 stone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001629 suppression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000001644 thecoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009966 trimming Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007740 vapor deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001755 vocal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003643 water by type Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003313 weakening effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003442 weekly effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- NAWDYIZEMPQZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N ytterbium Chemical compound [Yb] NAWDYIZEMPQZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
Landscapes
- Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
- Exposure Of Semiconductors, Excluding Electron Or Ion Beam Exposure (AREA)
Abstract
Description
200400540 玖、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 ▲西本&明係關於投影光學系統之調整方法、預測方法、 平j貝方去5周整方法、曝光方法及曝光裝置、程式以及元 件製仏方法,進—步詳言之,係關於將第1面上之圖宰像 投影在第2面上之投影光學系統之調整方法,透過投影光 予系統來制11案像之特性的預測方法,㈣該預測方法 來評價圖案像之特性的評價方法,利用該評價方法來調整 =案像之形成狀態的調整方法,㈣該調整方法或前述投 影光學系統之調整方法將圖案形成在物體 非常適合實施該曝光方法或投影光學系統之調整方法= 光裝置,使電腦執行前述預測方法的程<,以及使用前述 曝光方法或曝光裝置的元件製造方法。 【先前技術】 -般而言’在製造半導體元件、顯示元件、薄膜磁頭 、微機等微元件之微影製#呈巾,係使用冑形成在遮光罩或 標線片(以下,總稱為「標線片」)之圖案,透過投影光學 系統,轉印在晶圓或玻璃板等感應物體(以下,總稱為「晶 圓」)上’所謂之步進器或所謂之掃描器(也稱為掃描步進 器)等投影曝光裝置。 習知’這種曝光裝置,當量測藉由曝光形成在晶圓上 之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印像(光阻像等)之線寬差時, 投影光學系統之縱線圖案像與橫線圖案像之對比差之原因 200400540 ’係認為慧形像差等非對稱像差為其主因。因此,量測結 果’當無法量測出慧形像差等非對稱像差成份時,不易: 正線寬差。 / …最近’在組裝投影光學系統日夺’係使用干涉計來量測 投影光學系統之視野内(或曝光範圍内)各位置之波面像差 ’使=查淫克(Zemike)多項式(例如,條紋查淫克多項式) 將該量測之波面像差(像差函數)予以級數展開,並進行調 整,以使所得到級數各項(各查淫克項)之各係數(查淫克係 數)之大小分別為目標值以下。進行這種調整係因為前述級 數各項(各查涅克項)分別表示特定波面像差成份,各項係 數係表示各像差成份大小之故。 最近,投影光學系統(投影透鏡)之像差控制精度,係 對上述投影光學系統之製程導入波面像差量測,藉由使用 波面像差之查淫克多項式之級數展開之控制而快速提高。 又’根據使用查涅克多項式將波面像差 開各項(各查淫克項)之大小(杳淫克係數彳^ ^ 數)展 、一 ’兄你數)、與查涅克感产200400540 发明 Description of the invention: [Technical field to which the invention belongs] ▲ Nishimoto & Ming's method for adjusting the projection optical system, prediction method, flat method to 5 weeks, exposure method and exposure device, program and component system仏 Methods, step by step, in detail, it is a method of adjusting the projection optical system that projects the image on the first surface onto the second surface, and uses the projection light to the system to predict the characteristics of the 11 images. ㈣ This evaluation method is an evaluation method to evaluate the characteristics of the pattern image. Use this evaluation method to adjust = the adjustment method of the formation state of the case image. ㈣ This adjustment method or the aforementioned adjustment method of the projection optical system is very suitable for forming a pattern on an object. Implementation of the exposure method or the adjustment method of the projection optical system = an optical device, a process of causing a computer to execute the aforementioned prediction method < and a device manufacturing method using the aforementioned exposure method or exposure device. [Previous technology]-Generally speaking, "microfilm manufacturing" for manufacturing semiconductor devices, display devices, thin-film magnetic heads, microcomputers and other micro-components is made of hoods, which are formed on a hood or a reticle (hereinafter referred to as "standard" "Lines") are transferred to a sensing object (hereinafter referred to as a "wafer") such as a wafer or a glass plate through a projection optical system. The so-called stepper or so-called scanner (also called scanning Stepper) and other projection exposure devices. Known 'This exposure device measures the vertical line pattern of the optical system when measuring the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and horizontal line pattern transfer image (photoresist image, etc.) formed on the wafer by exposure. The reason why the contrast between the image and the horizontal line pattern image is 200400540 'is that asymmetric aberration such as coma aberration is considered as the main cause. Therefore, the measurement result is not easy when asymmetric aberration components such as coma aberration cannot be measured: positive line width difference. /… Recently, “In the assembly of the projection optical system,” the interferometer is used to measure the wavefront aberrations at various positions in the field of view (or exposure range) of the projection optical system. 'Zemike' polynomial (for example, Stripe checker polynomial) Expand the measured wavefront aberration (aberration function) series and adjust it so that the coefficients of each of the series (each checker term) of the obtained series (checker checker) Coefficients) are below the target values. This adjustment is performed because the aforementioned series of terms (each Chaney term) respectively indicate a specific wavefront aberration component, and each coefficient indicates the magnitude of each aberration component. Recently, the accuracy of aberration control of projection optical systems (projection lenses) has been improved by introducing wavefront aberration measurement into the above-mentioned process of the projection optical system, and it has been rapidly improved by using the expansion of the check polynomial of wavefront aberrations. . Also, according to the use of Zanek polynomials, the wavefront aberrations are divided into terms (each sine gram term) (the sine gram coefficient 彳 ^ ^ number), one ‘brother ’s number,’ and Zanek is inducted.
SensitlVlty)表之線性結合,來求出投影光學二 之成像性能’例如’像差(或該指標值),藉由所謂查淫克 感度法’關於像差之影響,纟能針對簡易者用簡單之方法 來判斷。此處,所謂查淫克感度表係指由分別相显之曝光 條件、即光學條件(曝光波長、最大Na 1定用ΝΑ、照明 照明系統開Π光圈之開口形狀等)、評價項目(遮光罩 員、線寬、評價量、圖案之資訊等)、在藉由這些光學條 件與評價項目之組合所規定之複數個曝光條件Τ,分別所 200400540 求出之投影光學系統之成像性能,例如,各種像差(或該指 標值)之各查涅克項之每丨λ之變化量所構成之計算表。 但疋’亦有未必能適用所謂查涅克法的評價量,其係 線見Μ化。關於該線寬變化,係如ν〇ι·4346之 第713頁所揭示,根據像差之旋轉對稱成份(〇0成份)、2 階旋轉對稱成份㈤成份),線寬成為最大之聚焦位置變化 ,且其線寬之最大值也變化。而且,亦存纟2個像差⑽ 成份、2Θ成份)之相互作用。因此,所謂查淫克感度法不 適用線寬之推定。 在使用條紋查〉圼克多項式,將波面像差級數展開之上 述旋轉對稱成份(0Θ成份)項中,包含表示散焦之低階項, 即第4項(係婁欠ζ4)或表示低階球面像差之SensitlVlty) table linear combination to obtain the imaging performance of projection optics 'for example' aberration (or the index value), by the so-called "sensitometric sensitivity method" on the influence of aberration, can not be simple for the simple Way to judge. Here, the so-called Sensitivity Sensitivity Table refers to the exposure conditions, that is, the optical conditions (exposure wavelength, the maximum Na 1 setting, the opening shape of the opening of the illumination system, etc.), and the evaluation items (shade hood) (E.g., line width, evaluation amount, pattern information, etc.), the imaging performance of the projection optical system determined by the plurality of exposure conditions T specified by the combination of these optical conditions and evaluation items, respectively, 200,400,540, for example, various A calculation table consisting of the amount of change in each Zanek term of the aberration (or the index value). However, there is also an evaluation quantity that is not necessarily applicable to the so-called Zanek method. Regarding this line width change, as disclosed in page 713 of ν〇 · 4346, according to the rotationally symmetric component (0 0 component) of the aberration, and the second-order rotationally symmetric component ㈤ component), the line width becomes the maximum focus position change. , And the maximum value of its line width also changes. In addition, there are interactions between the two aberration components (the 2 component and the 2 component). Therefore, the so-called Chalk Sensitivity method is not applicable to the estimation of line width. The above-mentioned rotationally symmetric component (0Θ component) term that expands the wavefront aberration series using fringe check> 圼 gram polynomials includes a low-order term indicating defocus, that is, the fourth term (which is owed to ζ4) or low Of spherical aberration
’這些㈣成,員之波面變化係等方性,因此,二(I 線)Η線d線)之圖案成像狀態之影響相等。又,2階旋 轉對稱成份(20成份)項有表示低階像散像差之第5項(係 數z5)或表示高階像散像差之第12項(係數zj,但對這此 2Θ成份項之縱線圖案之成像狀態之影響: 像狀態之影響,其符號雖相反 S木之成 付*去Μ 具大小相等。因此,以 未考慮因1亥00成份項與2Θ成份項之 ’兩者之係數(成份)都不是零)所造 ^卩 像線寬之像差影響的差。 ^線、k、線圖案 ^於這種情況,關於縱㈣案與橫線圖案像之線 ,目剞並無簡易且確實的$丨 、、見 。 “的判疋方法,因此,其調整亦困難 200400540 本發明係在上述情況下,其第1目的係提供投影光學 系統之調整方法’特別是其係能自由控制相互正交之線圖 案像彼此間之線寬差。 ’° 本發明之第2目的你担i益、nl +、丄 ^ 係k供預測方法,其能簡易且高精 度的預測透過投影光學系統之圖案像之特性。 本發明之弟3目的将祖址作进士、丄 幻係楗供评價方法,其能簡易且高 度的評價透過投影光學系統之圖案像之特性。 本發明之弟4目的你祖/i£ , 的係棱供凋整方法,其能簡易且高精 度的調整透過投影光學系統之圖案像之特性。 本發明之弟5目的作祖/if μ . 係詖ί、曝先方法及曝光裝置,i 透過投影光學系統將圖案形成在物體上。 /、 2發明之第6目的係提供程式,其係透過投影光學系 統’旎用短時間且高精度執行圖案轉印特性之預測。 本發明之第7目的係提供元件製造方法 提高元件之生產性。 、有力方、 【發明内容】 乍看之下會認為在使用查埋克多項式(例 克^式)進行級數展開之旋轉對稱成份㈣成份 ^疋㈣稱成份(2Θ成份)項中,益無相互關聯性。但 赍明人寺重禝各種實驗(包含模 因光瞳面内(向徑多項式之獨立變數/上’發現 份與2Θ成份之各成份)之相位分 1 〇θ成 之波面錯亂有時在縱方向與橫方向上有戶=’光瞳面内 ’所不同。例如,當 200400540 使用條紋查;^圼$ & ύ4τ , 係數Z 像差級數展開之第12項( '2成伤不是零時’發現藉由構成投影光 、 光學元件之移動與交換來變更球面像差成份之第9 4之 a)之大小,藉此能控制光瞳面内之上下成7二9項(係數 分布’能調整前述縱橫線之線寬差。工右方向之相位 ’採等所… 面上,其特徵在:::將…上之圖案像投影⑷ 弟1製程,係取得包含前述投影光學系統之 特性之資訊; 弟1光孚 第2製程’係使用前述投影光學 上所配置之既定方向延伸之第匕線:::',:述弟1面 正交之第2線圖案之像, 口人第1線圖案 第1線寬(係前述第i線g幸月j述弟2面上’並且’量測 、、泉圖案像之線寬)與第 第2㈣案像之線寬)之線寬差;以及 、線見⑷則述 弟3製程,係根據前述第!製程所得到之 學特性之值與前述線寬差,為了控制因與前述第:光學特 性之相互作用而使前述線寬差受广1先子心 小,調整前述投影光學系統。,、曰$ 2光學特性之大 成第= ^中’也可使用投影光學系統,來形 成弟1線圖案與弟2線圖、, 前述第1線圖案像之線寬)與:::丨第1線寬(其係 弟 線見(其係前述第2線圖 10 200400540 案像之線寬)之線寬差,也可在形成第丨線圖案與第2線圖 案之像後,來量測前述線寬差。 若依此的話,例如,為了控制容易調整之第2光與诗士 性之大小,調整投影光學系統,藉此能控制前述之γ 其係因投影光學系統之調整困難之第i光學特性存在所起 因而產生P因此,自由且確實地進行習知不易相互正交 之線圖案像彼此間線寬差之控制。 在這種情況下,當前试筮 弟1製程所得到之資甸為’ 投影光學系統之波面像差資訊時,在前述第3製程二:: 用查涅克多項式,將前述第 、王 水 展開之複數個查淫克項m #所付到之波面像差級數 變數之階數為4階以上)之:P白以上(向徑多項式之獨立 不是零時,根據前述2階2階旋轉對稱成份項之大小 寬差,為了控制前㉛2#成份項之大小與前述線 轉對稱成份項之大小 < 疋對稱成份項與同一階數之旋 在這種情況下,前:=述投影光學系統。 0成份項之第丨2項,前、^旋轉對稱成份項係4階C0S2 項之第9項,或前述^f旋轉對稱成份項係4階0Θ成份 份項之第13項,前述旋二%轉對稱成份項係4階sin2e成 第9項。 疋對稱成份項係4階〇θ成份項之 本發明之第〗投影光學 所得到之資訊為投影光學/,、、,先之调整方法係當第1製程 第1製程係直接量測系j之波面像差之資訊時,前述 到前述波面像差之資訊,H影光學系統之波面,藉此能得 或則述第1製程係在各組量測複 200400540 數組之前述第】線圖案(其係配置 異)與前述第2線圖案之 /弟面上,大小相 〆 篆^/成0卞之最佳平隹 據該量測結果,也能推定&、+、 取仏汆焦位置之差,根 來作A二、+、+ 則述2階旋轉對稱成份項之資訊 來作為則述波面像差之資訊。 乂刀貝(貝λ 本發明之第1投影光學系 程所得到之資 …凋1方法,係當第1製 、十、— 、為技衫光學系統之波面像差之資1日士 ^ 述弟3製程係前述2階旋轉 〜孔訏,則 前述第”程… 無成份項之大小不是零,且 表表所置測之前述線 2階旋轉對稱成份頊之士 f纟 疋々妆,係根據前述 风切員之大小與前械* 寬差趨近設計值, 、、、 ,為了使前述線 旋轉對稱成份項盥同H \予系、,先’以使前述2階 化。 η ρ 白數之旋轉對稱成份項之大小最佳 本發明之第i投影光學系統 中,透過投影光學系統,將第!、第2之=:弟2製程 投影像)形成在第2面上 線圖木之空間像( 間像,也能求出第】始 =間像篁測器來量測這些空 pp^ 出弟1線圖案與第2線圖案像之续* 限於此,前述第2製程係包含有:罕像之線見’但不 像形成製程,传脾二# 前述第2面上所配置之體〗、第2線圖案之像形成在 I W直之物體上;以及 線寬量測製程,係量測第i 之則述第1線圖宰 战在則述物體上 -,^ 像之線寬)與第2線寬(係形成太_ 體上之前述第2線圖案 成在則述物 準系統或SEM等,來旦、| 吏用曝光裝置之調 2绐m 來里測形成在物體上之第丨線 2線圖案之潛像 1線圖案、第 先阻像、或蝕刻像等,能求出該線寬。 12 200400540 製^發明…投影光學系統之調整方法,在前述第3 ,係猎由構成前述投影光學系統之至少 …自由度方向之位置控制及部份光程中之氣體声 力控制之至少-方,來控制前述第2光學特 “厂土 本發明之第…光學系統之調整方法,之前大述;Μ :案係縱線圖案’前述帛2線圖案係橫線圖案,前述第i =特性與第2光學特性係經由對前述縱線圖案像與前述 榼線圖案像分別之線寬變化之查涅克項組合之交又項中求 出查沒克感度之製程、及求出該交叉項中之查埋克感度符 就在縱橫線相異之查埋克項彼此項之組合之製程來決定。 。本發明之第1投影光學系統之調整方法,前述第以 =所得収資訊係前述投影光學系統之波面冑差之資訊: :述第1及第2光學特性係使用查淫克多項式,在將前述 弟/製程所得到之波面像差級數展開之複數個查涅克項中 ,係同一階數,且種類相異成份之項。 右從第2觀點來看的話,本發明之第丨曝光方法,係 透過投影光學系統’將第!面上之電路圖案轉印在第2面 上所配置之物體上,其包含有: 調整製程,,係使用本發明之第丨投影光學系統之調整 方法,來調整前述投影光學系統;以及 轉印製程,其係使用前述調整後之投影光學系統,將 前述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 若依此的話,因使用本發明之第丨投影光學系統之調 整方法,來調整投影光學系統,故為了使縱線圖案與橫線 13 200400540 圖案像之線寬差確實成為設計值,調整投影光學系統。例 如,调整投影光學系統,以使同一線寬之縱線圖案與橫線 圖案像之線寬差最小(例如,零)。又,因使用該調整之投 影光學系、统,使電路圖案轉印在物體上,故能實現減低縱 線圖案與橫線圖案線寬差之高精度圖案之轉印。 若從第3觀點來看的話,本發明之第i曝光裳置,係 透過曝光用光學系、、统,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上’其特徵在於,備有將使用本發明之第i投影光學系統 之調整方法來調整之招·吾彡本與$ μ > + η κ杈衫先學糸統作為前述曝光用光學系 統。 '、 若依此的話,因備有將使用本發明之第ι投影光學系 統之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為曝光用光學系: ’故使用該投影光學系、統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在 勿體上’ #此能實現減低縱線圖案與橫線圖 精度圖案之轉印。 若從第4觀點來看的話,本發明係投 2調整方法,係將第1面上之圖案像投影在第21上: 特徵在於,包含: W上’具 第1製私,係取得包含前述投 特性之資訊;以及 …糸統之弟丨光學 第2製程,係根據前述第i製 學特性之值、與第,線圖案(係在前述第光 定方向延伸)之線寬與第2線圖案 -置之既 夺、綠★夕呈 ^ ”引迷弟1線圖案正 差,為了控制由於與前述第1光學特性之相互作 14 200400540 前述第2面上所形成之前述第1線圖案像線寬 弟2:圖案像線寬之線寬差受影響之第2光學特性:大 J 调整丽述投影光學系統。 大 若依此的話,則根據第丨光學特性 案與第2線圖案線寬之差,$ 了控制 ”弟1線圖 % 1 7^ ^ ^ α 工弟2光子特性(係由於 弟 先學特性之相互作用,而 氺與έΡ曰線見差,其係藉由投影 先子糸統,形成在前述第2面上 官盘二、+、Μ 之則述弟1線圖案像之線 見與則述弟2線圖案線寬之差)之大 ,因& ^ 差)之大小,調整投影光學系統These changes, the wave surface changes of the members are isotropic, so the effect of the pattern imaging state of the two (I line), Η line, and d line) is equal. Also, the second-order rotationally symmetric component (20-component) term has the fifth term (coefficient z5) representing low-order astigmatic aberration or the 12th term (coefficient zj) representing high-order astigmatic aberration, but for these 2Θ component terms The effect of the imaging state of the vertical line pattern: Although the sign of the image state is the opposite, the sign of the S wood is not equal to the size of the M. Therefore, it is not considered that the two components of the 1H00 component and the 2Θ component are not considered. (The coefficients (components) are all non-zero). ^ Line, k, line pattern ^ In this case, there is no simple and reliable $ 丨, see, for the line of longitudinal pattern and horizontal line pattern image. See. "The judgment method is difficult to adjust. 200400540 The first purpose of the present invention is to provide a method for adjusting the projection optical system under the above circumstances. In particular, it is capable of freely controlling mutually orthogonal line pattern images. The line width difference. '° The second purpose of the present invention is to provide a predictive method for i, nl +, and 丄 ^, which can easily and accurately predict the characteristics of the pattern image transmitted through the projection optical system. Brother 3 aims to use the ancestral site as an evaluation method for scholars and imaginary systems, which can easily and highly evaluate the characteristics of the pattern image through the projection optical system. Brother 4 of the present invention, your ancestor / i £ For the trimming method, it can easily and accurately adjust the characteristics of the pattern image transmitted through the projection optical system. The 5th purpose of the present invention is the ancestor / if μ. It is based on the previous method and exposure device. The system forms a pattern on an object. / The sixth object of the second invention is to provide a program that performs the prediction of the pattern transfer characteristics in a short time and with high accuracy through the projection optical system. The seventh object of the present invention is to provide The method of manufacturing components improves the productivity of components. [Abstract] At first glance, it will be considered that the rotationally symmetric component of the series expansion using the Charm's polynomial (e.g., ^ formula) In the (2Θ component) term, there is no correlation between benefits. However, the Mingming Temple repeats various experiments (including the memetic pupil plane (independent variable of the radial polynomial / upper's discovery and each component of the 2Θ component). The wavefront disorder with phase division of 1 θθ is sometimes different in the vertical and horizontal directions = 'in pupil plane'. For example, when 200400540 uses fringe lookup; ^ 圼 $ & ύ4τ, coefficient Z aberration level Item 12 of the number expansion ('2% injury is not zero') It is found that the size of the 9th a) of the spherical aberration component is changed by constituting the projection light and the movement and exchange of optical elements, thereby controlling the pupil Above and below the plane, there are 7 2 9 items (the coefficient distribution 'can adjust the line width difference of the aforementioned vertical and horizontal lines. The phase in the right direction of the work' is on the other side ... It is characterized by ::: projecting the pattern on ... Brother 1 process is to obtain the characteristics including the aforementioned projection optical system Information; Brother 1 Guangfu's 2nd process 'is the use of the second line extending in the predetermined direction configured on the aforementioned projection optics :::' ,: The image of the second line pattern orthogonal to Brother 1's surface, the first person of the mouth The line width of the first line width of the line pattern (which is the line width of the "i" measurement on the 2nd line of the "i" line, and the line width of the spring pattern image) and the line width of the second frame image); In addition, the line 3 process is based on the above-mentioned process characteristics and the aforementioned line width difference. In order to control the interaction between the above-mentioned optical characteristics and the aforementioned line width difference, 1 The ancestor has a small heart, adjust the aforementioned projection optical system. ,, said the $ 2 optical characteristics of the large == ^ 'can also use the projection optical system to form the 1st line pattern and the 2nd line figure, the first line The line width of the pattern image and ::: 丨 the 1st line width (see the line width of the brother line (which is the line width of the second line picture 10 200400540 case image)) can also form the first line pattern After measuring the image with the second line pattern, the line width difference is measured. If this is the case, for example, in order to control the size of the second light and poetry that is easy to adjust, adjust the projection optical system, so that the aforementioned γ can be controlled because of the i-th optical characteristic that is difficult to adjust the projection optical system. As a result, P is generated. Therefore, it is possible to freely and surely control the difference in line width between line patterns that are not easily orthogonal to each other. In this case, when the Zidian obtained by the current test 1 process is the wavefront aberration information of the projection optical system, in the aforementioned third process 2: using the Zernike polynomial, expand the aforementioned first and second waters. The number of complex grammatical terms m # paid to the wavefront aberration series variable is greater than 4th order: above P white (when the independence of the radial polynomial is not zero, according to the aforementioned second-order and second-order rotational symmetry In order to control the size and width of the component term, in order to control the size of the front ㉛2 # component term and the size of the aforementioned line-to-symmetry component term < the 成份 symmetric component term and the spin of the same order, in this case, the front: = mentioned projection optical system The 2nd item of the 0 component item, the front and ^ rotationally symmetric component items are the 9th item of the 4th order C0S2 item, or the aforementioned ^ f rotationally symmetric component item is the 13th item of the 4th order 0Θ component item, the aforementioned spin two The% symmetric component term is the fourth-order sin2e into the ninth term. 疋 The symmetrical component term is the fourth-order θθ component term of the invention according to the projection optics of the present invention. The information obtained is the projection optics, and the first adjustment method is When the first process of the first process is to directly measure the wavefront aberration information of the system j, With reference to the aforementioned wavefront aberration information, the wavefront of the H-shadow optical system can be used to obtain or describe the first line pattern (which is different in configuration) of the first process based on the 200400540 array in each group. According to the measurement result, the best level of the two-line pattern on the / brother surface is ^^ / 0. According to the measurement result, the difference between the &, +, and the focal position can be estimated, and the root is A2. , +, + The information of the second-order rotationally symmetric component term is used as the information of the wavefront aberration. 乂 刀 贝 (贝 λ λ The information obtained by the first projection optical system of the present invention ... with the method of 1 The 1st system, 10th, and 1st are the cost of wavefront aberration of the shirt optical system. ^ The 3rd process of the brother is the second-order rotation ~ hole 訏, then the size of the aforementioned "process ..." is not zero. In addition, the above-mentioned line of the second-order rotationally symmetric composition of the aforementioned line is designed according to the size of the wind-cutting member and the width of the front machine *. The width approaches the design value, in order to make the line The rotationally symmetric component term is the same as H \ Yu, and first 'to make the aforementioned 2nd order. Η ρ The rotationally symmetric component term of the white number In the i-th projection optical system with the best size of the present invention, through the projection optical system, the first !, the second =: Brother 2 process projection image) is formed on the second surface of the line image (interim image, can also be Calculate the first and second image detectors to measure these empty pp ^ The first line pattern and the second line pattern image of the younger brother are continuation * limited to this, the aforementioned second process system includes: see the line of rare images' but Unlike the forming process, Chuanpi ## The body arranged on the second surface mentioned above, the image of the second line pattern is formed on the IW-straight object; and the line width measurement process, which is the first one described in the first measurement The line graph is on the object-, ^ the line width of the image), and the second line width (forms the above-mentioned second line pattern on the body is formed in the object-level system or SEM, etc., Lai Dan, | The line width can be obtained by measuring the latent image, the first blocked image, or the etched image of the first line and second line pattern formed on the object with the tone of the exposure device 2 绐 m. 12 200400540 Manufacturing invention ... The adjustment method of the projection optical system, in the third aspect, at least one of the position control of at least the direction of freedom constituting the aforementioned projection optical system and the control of gas acoustic force in a part of the optical path is provided. Control method of the aforementioned second optical feature "factory of the present invention. The optical system adjustment method of the present invention is described in the foregoing; M: the case is the vertical line pattern 'the aforementioned 帛 2 line pattern is the horizontal line pattern, the aforementioned i = characteristics and the second The optical characteristics are obtained through the process of obtaining the Chanck sensitivity in the cross term of the combination of the Zernike term combinations of the line width changes of the aforementioned vertical line pattern image and the aforementioned stern line pattern image, and the cross term The buried sensitivity is determined by the manufacturing process of the combination of the checked and buried items that are different in the vertical and horizontal lines. The first projection optical system adjustment method of the present invention, the aforementioned == received information is the aforementioned projection optical system. Information on wavefront aberrations:: The first and second optical characteristics are described by using Chase polynomials, which are the same order in the plurality of Chainec terms that expand the wavefront aberration series obtained by the aforementioned brother / process. And kind The term of different components. From the second point of view, according to the second exposure method of the present invention, a circuit pattern on the first surface is transferred to an object arranged on the second surface through a projection optical system. Including: an adjustment process, which uses the method for adjusting the projection optical system of the present invention to adjust the aforementioned projection optical system; and a transfer process, which uses the aforementioned adjusted projection optical system to transfer the aforementioned circuit pattern On the aforementioned object. If so, because the projection optical system is adjusted using the method of adjusting the projection optical system of the present invention, in order to make the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line 13 200400540 pattern image become a design Value, adjust the projection optical system. For example, adjust the projection optical system so that the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern image of the same line width is the smallest (for example, zero). In addition, the projection optical system using this adjustment, System, so that the circuit pattern is transferred to the object, so that the transfer of high-precision patterns that reduce the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern can be realized. From the third point of view Then, the i-th exposure dress of the present invention is to transfer the pattern formed on the hood on the object through the optical system for exposure. It is characterized by having an i-th projection optical system using the present invention. The adjustment method to adjust the method. I have to learn the system and $ μ > + η κ t shirt first to learn the system as the aforementioned exposure optical system. ', If this is the case, because the use of the first projection of the invention Optical system adjustment method to adjust the projection optical system as the optical system for exposure: 'So using this projection optical system, the pattern formed on the hood is transferred to the body' #This can reduce the vertical line pattern and The transfer of the precision pattern of the horizontal line graph. From the point of view of the fourth aspect, the present invention is a method of adjusting 2 and is a method of projecting a pattern image on the first surface onto the 21st: It is characterized by including: W 上 '具The first system is to obtain the information including the aforementioned investment characteristics; and ... the younger brother of the system 丨 the second optical process is based on the values of the i system characteristics and the line pattern (in the direction of the aforementioned light setting) (Extended) line width and 2nd line pattern-set Both the green and the eve of the night ^ ”draw the difference between the 1 line pattern of the fans, in order to control the interaction with the first optical characteristics 14 200400540 The first line pattern formed on the second surface is like the line width 2 : The second optical characteristic in which the line width difference of the pattern image line width is affected: Large J adjusts the Lishu projection optical system. If this is the case, then according to the difference between the optical characteristics of the first and second line patterns and the line width of the second line pattern, the $ 1 control line graph is% 1 7 ^ ^ ^ α The interaction between the two lines is different from that of the two lines. It is formed by projecting the ancestor system and formed on the second surface of the official disc II, +, and M. The line pattern image of the line 1 and the line 2 The difference between the line width of the 2-line pattern is too large, and the projection optical system is adjusted due to the & ^ difference).
^ ^ k , 战在弟2面上之第1線圖 案像之咖帛2線圖案線像線寬之差(線寬差),因第丨 面上之第1線圖案線寬與第2線圖案線寬之差而產生時, 例如’因遮光罩上圖案之描晝誤差等起因而產生時,能自 由控制正交線圖案彼此之線寬差。 在這種情況下,前述第1線圖案係縱線圖案,前述第 2線圖案係橫線圖案,前述g i光學特性與第之光學特性^ ^ k, the difference between the line width of the 1st line pattern image on the 2nd line and the 2nd line pattern line image difference (line width difference), because the 1st line pattern line width and the 2nd line on the 1st line When the difference between the pattern line widths occurs, for example, 'if it is caused by a day-to-day error in the pattern on the hood, the line width difference between the orthogonal line patterns can be freely controlled. In this case, the first line pattern is a vertical line pattern, the second line pattern is a horizontal line pattern, and the optical characteristics and g
係經由對前述縱線㈣像與前述橫線圖案像各線寬變化之 查涅克項組合之交叉項中龙ψ左、θ … 又貝U出查涅克感度之製程、及求出 ,亥父又項中之查涅克感度符號在縱橫線相異之查涅克項彼 此組合之製程來決定。 若從第5觀點來看的話,本發明之第2曝光方法,係 透過投影光學系統,將第1面上之電路圖案轉印在第2面 上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含有: 調整製程,係使用本發明之第2投影光學系統之調整 方法’來調整前述投影光學系統;以及 15 200400540 光學糸統,將前 轉印製程,係使用前述調整後之投影 述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 、若依此的話,因制本發” 2投影光學系統之調整 方法來5周整投影光學系、統,例如,因遮光罩上圖案之描 晝誤差:起因而產生藉由投影光學系統,形成在前述第2 面上之前述第1線圖案像之線寬與前述第2線圖案線寬之 差(線寬差)時,進行投影光學系統之調整,以使自由控制 正交線圖案彼此之線寬差’因使用該調整之投影光學系統Based on the cross term of the combination of the Zanek terms of the line width image and the line pattern image, the dragon ψ is left, θ, and the process of the Zanek sensitivity is calculated and calculated. The process of combining the Zanek sensitivity symbols in the other terms with the Zanek terms of which the vertical and horizontal lines are different is determined. From a fifth point of view, the second exposure method of the present invention uses a projection optical system to transfer a circuit pattern on the first surface onto an object arranged on the second surface, and is characterized by including: : The adjustment process is to adjust the aforementioned projection optical system using the adjustment method of the second projection optical system of the present invention; and 15 200400540 optical system, the front transfer process uses the aforementioned adjusted projection circuit pattern transfer On the aforementioned object. 2. If this is the case, because of the production system, the method of adjusting the projection optical system is to complete the projection optical system and system for 5 weeks, for example, due to the daylight error of the pattern on the hood: When the difference between the line width of the first line pattern image and the line width of the second line pattern (line width difference) on the second surface is adjusted, the projection optical system is adjusted so that the orthogonal line patterns can be freely controlled. Linewidth difference 'due to the projection optical system using this adjustment
將電路圖案轉印在物體上現減低縱線圖案與橫線 圖案線寬差之高精度圖案轉印。 若從第6觀點來看的話,本發明之第2曝光裝置,係 透過曝光用光學系、統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上,其特徵在於,備有:係將使用本發明第2投影光學系 統之調*方法來調|之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用= 系統。 予 若依此的話,因備有將使用本發明第2投影光學系統 之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為曝光用光學系統、, 故使用投影光學系、統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上,藉此能實現減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案線寬差之高精^ 之圖案之轉印。 又 若從第7觀點來看的話,本發明之第3投影光學系統 之調整方法,係將第丨面上之圖案像投影在第2面上,其 特徵在於,包含有: 取得前述投影光學系統之波面像差資訊之製程; 16 200400540 取得有關前述圖案之投影像資訊之製程;以及 凋整製程,係使用杳 級數展開之複數個杳μ項=中夕':;在將前述波面像差 投影像特性受影響之任意查埋克項之組合之交又項= ΐΐΓ:感度對前述投影像特性之變化,來調整前述投影 若依此的話,則能得到投影光學系统 ,且能得到有關圖宰投马後 j ' 象差之貝讯 案“,像之資訊。並且,根據這此資訊Transferring the circuit pattern to the object now reduces the high-precision pattern transfer between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. From the point of view of the sixth aspect, the second exposure device of the present invention transfers the pattern formed on the hood to the object through the optical system and system for exposure. It is characterized by having: The second method of adjusting the projection optical system of the invention is to adjust the projection optical system of | as the aforementioned exposure system. If this is the case, a projection optical system adjusted using the second projection optical system adjustment method of the present invention is provided as an exposure optical system. Therefore, the projection optical system and system are used to transform the pattern formed on the hood. It can be printed on the object, which can realize the transfer of the pattern with high precision ^ which reduces the difference between the width of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. From the seventh point of view, the adjustment method of the third projection optical system of the present invention is to project the pattern image on the first surface onto the second surface, which is characterized by including: obtaining the aforementioned projection optical system The process of wavefront aberration information; 16 200400540 The process of obtaining the projection image information about the aforementioned pattern; and the process of aging, which uses the 杳 series to expand a plurality of 项 μ terms = Zhongxi ': in the aforementioned wavefront aberration The crossover of any combination of grammar terms affected by the projection image characteristics = ΐΐΓ: The change in sensitivity to the aforementioned projection image characteristics to adjust the aforementioned projections. If this is the case, a projection optical system can be obtained, and the relevant map can be obtained. After the death of the horse, "The aberration case of the aberration", like the information. And, based on this information
、’,來㈣投影光學系統之際’在使用查淫克多項式;·將于 述波面像差級數展開之複數 、、月J 作用而使前述投影像特性受影:之=中,在因該相互 六▽语士也 又〜譬之任思查涅克項之組合之 乂 、,慮查涅克感度對前述投影像特性之變化, 整前述投影光學系統。即, 子Γ之义化口周 ^ , ^ Λ 在Μ弟3杈4光學系統之調整 特性°所未考慮之其相互作用係在使圖案之投影像 …之任意查淫克項之組合之交 克=前㈣像特性之變化,調整前述投影光;系:统 =騎困難之像差成份,例如,也能調整高階像差 ^ 能調整投影光學系統,以使圖案像之形成狀態更 佳。 在k種情況下’當前述圖案包含線圖案時,前述投影 像之特性能包含該線圖案之線寬。 …若從第8觀點來看的話,則本發明之第3曝光方法, 係透過^光學系統,將第丨面上之電路圖案轉印在第2 面上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含: 17 200400540 調整製程’係使用本發明之第3投影光學系統之調整‘ 方法,來調整前述投影光學系統;以及 、,轉印製程,係使用前述調整後之投影光學系統,將前 述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 <若依此的話,因使用本發明之第3投影光學系統之調 整方法,來調整前述投影光學系統,故進行投影光學系統 :調整’以使圖案像之形成狀態更佳,因使用該調整之投 影光學系統,將電路圖案轉印在物體上,故能實現高精度 圖案之轉印。 · 、¥從第9觀點來看的話’本發明之第3曝光裝置,係 透過曝光用光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上^其特徵在於,備有:將使用本發明第3投影光學系統 周t方法來调整之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用光學系 統。 ^若依本發明的話,因備有將使用本發明第3投影光學 2之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用光 學系統,故使用該光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印 # 在物體上,藉此能實現高精度圖案之轉印。 右從第10觀點來看的話,本發明係第4曝光裝置,係 用此里束來照明第丨面上所配置之圖案,透過投影光學系 統,將前述圖案轉印在第2面上所配置之物體上,其特徵 在於,備有: …光學特性量測裝置,係量測光學特性(包含前述投影光 學系統之第1光學特性); 18 200400540 線寬量測裝置’係分別量測第i線圖案(其係在前述第 =上所配置之既定方向延伸)之線寬與第2線圖案(其係 與刖述第1線圖案正交)之線寬之差; 像形成狀態調整裝置’係調整前述投影 案像之形成狀態·,以及 述第置,係根據前述光學特性量測裝置所量測之前 所旦%學特性之值、與第1線寬(係用前述線寬量測裝置 斤里測之前述第1線圖案像之線寬 2線圖案像之㈣、夕… 線寬(係前述第 抑制第2、 牲 ,用前述像形成狀態調整裝置來 =2先學特性(係由於與前述第丨光學特 而使W述線寬差受影響)之大小。 作用 若依本發明的話,則能藉由 峨性(包含投影光學系統之至少;、 稭由線寬量測裝置,分別量彳 予、 又, 學系統,在第2面(像面、 圖案(其係藉由投影光 在弟1面(像面)上所形成之第i面(物 既疋方向延伸)與第2線圖 在 。此處,使用線寬量測褒置:線寬,圖案正交) 2面上所配置之物體上之同里測也可量測形成在第 像、光阻像、_象)之線寬橫線圖案之轉印像(潛 之空間像形成在第2面上,來曰、:將縱線圖案與橫線圖案 又,控制褒置,當用光學空間像之線寬。 學特性存在時,係根據該第裝:所量:… 係用線寬量測裝置所量’之 及第1線寬( 19 1 線寬(前述第2線圖案==圖案像之線寬)與第 冢之線見)之差(線寬差),使用像形 ^UU4UU540 成狀態調整裝置,來 線寬差受㈣與弟1光學特性相互作用而使 乐2先學特性之大小。 因此,例如,如/ 土" 性之情形,例如,也2第1光學特性調整困難之光學特 調整容易之第2来!:::像形成狀態調整裝置,來控制 性之2先學特性之大小,藉此能控制帛!光學特 之存在所起因而產生之前述線寬差。 投影二二能量束來照明第1面上所配置之圖案,透過 特性後 能實現右4访〃 弟2面上所配置之物體上,藉此 好曝光。交之線圖案轉印像彼此間之線寬差之良 州像二光學特性量測裝置係量測前述投 在… 波面像差量測裝置。 式俜將兑^兄下’前述第1光學特性係使用杳埋克多項 式係將則述波面像差量測 τ克夕 之查涅克射4階以 里利之波面像差級數展開 述第2光學特性係前述2階::=轉對稱成份項,前 旋轉對稱成份項。 轉對稱成份項與同一階數之 在這種情況下,前述2階 成份之第12項及第13項之任轉對稱成份項係4階2Θ 係4階成份之第9項i之任一項,前述旋轉對稱成份項 本發明之第4曝光裝置 空間像量測器,係量測形成在切寬-測裝置也能包含 之投影像,且前述線寬量 弟2面上之前述各圖案 置也能包含攝影裝置,係拍 20 200400540 攝形成在前述第2面上所配置之物體上之像。 本發明之第4曝弁梦罟,a、> ^ ^二 、置則述像形成狀態調整裝置係 此在構成前述投影光學系統之至少、1個光學元件之至少i 、=度=之位置s周整、—部份光程中之氣體麼力之調整 开^述能量束之波長偏移量之調整、以及有關前述圖案所 :成之圖案形成構件及前述物體之至少一方之前述投影光 予糸統之光軸方向之調整中,至少進行一種調整。 若從第U觀點來看的話,係—種預測方法,係透過投 :光學系統來預測圖案像之特性,其特徵在於,包含預測 =程’係、根據複數項(係分別包含使用㈣之式,將前述投 4學系統之波面像差級數展開所得到之各像差成份)之線 =合’在既定曝光條件下,算出變動曲線(係表示有關透 過刖述投影光學系統所投影之既定圖案之像,前述像之大 、寸來自最佳聚焦位置之散焦量之變動),根據前述所算出 之移動里來預測前述變動曲線。 當透過投影光學系統來轉印圖案時,可以瞭解該圖案 :象:大小係根據來自該轉印位置之最佳聚焦位置之散焦量 來變動,表示該變動之變動曲線(即,所謂之CD_聚焦曲線 )係因投影光學系統之波面像差而變化。又,投影光學系統 之波面像差係使用既定之式(例如,查涅克多項式),來進 订級數展開,11此在複數個查淫克項(像差成份項),能加 以分解。 仗發明者等專心研究之結果可瞭解,在分別包含上述 查/圼克項之係數(即,像差成份)之複數項線性結合之值、 21 200400540 與有關透過投影光學系統所投影之圖案像之前述變動曲線 之k化(g卩’把散焦量及圖案像大小當作各座標軸之座標系 、充上之政焦里方向及像大小方向之該變動曲線之平行移動) ’有密切之關係。", When the projection optical system is used", the Chase polynomial is used; · The complex number, J, which will expand the wavefront aberration series, affects the aforementioned projection image characteristics: The mutual six ▽ linguist is also an example of a combination of Renschanek terms, taking into account the change in the characteristics of the projection image by the Channeck sensitivity, and adjusting the aforementioned projection optical system. That is to say, the adjustment characteristics of the sub-Γ's Yihuakou ^, ^ Λ in the 3rd and 4th optical system of the M °°, whose interactions are not considered are at the intersection of the combination of arbitrary search terms that make the image of the pattern ... Gram = changes in frontal image characteristics, adjust the aforementioned projection light; system: system = aberration components that are difficult to ride, for example, high-order aberrations can also be adjusted ^ the projection optical system can be adjusted to make the pattern image formation better. In case k, when the aforementioned pattern includes a line pattern, the characteristic of the aforementioned projected image includes the line width of the line pattern. … If viewed from the eighth point of view, the third exposure method of the present invention is to transfer a circuit pattern on the first surface onto an object arranged on the second surface through an optical system, which is characterized in that: Including: 17 200400540 The adjustment process 'adjusts using the third projection optical system of the present invention' method to adjust the aforementioned projection optical system; and, the transfer process uses the adjusted projection optical system to convert the aforementioned circuit pattern Transfer on the aforementioned object. < If so, because the third projection optical system adjustment method of the present invention is used to adjust the aforementioned projection optical system, the projection optical system is adjusted: 'to make the formation state of the pattern image better, because this adjustment is used The projection optical system transfers the circuit pattern to the object, so it can transfer the pattern with high precision. From the ninth point of view, the third exposure device of the present invention is a pattern that is formed on a hood and is transferred to an object through an exposure optical system. It is characterized in that: the present invention is used: The projection optical system adjusted by the third projection optical system is used as the aforementioned exposure optical system. ^ In accordance with the present invention, since a projection optical system adjusted using the third projection optical adjustment method of the present invention is provided as the aforementioned exposure optical system, the optical system is used to transfer the pattern formed on the hood # On the object, this can achieve high-precision pattern transfer. From the tenth point of view, the present invention is a fourth exposure device. The beam is used to illuminate the pattern arranged on the first surface, and the aforementioned pattern is transferred to the second surface through the projection optical system. On the object, it is characterized by having: ... an optical characteristic measuring device for measuring optical characteristics (including the first optical characteristic of the aforementioned projection optical system); 18 200400540 The line width measuring device is for measuring the i The difference between the line width of the line pattern (which extends in the predetermined direction configured on the aforementioned =) and the line width of the second line pattern (which is orthogonal to the first line pattern described above); the image formation state adjustment device ' It is used to adjust the formation state of the aforementioned projection image, and the first position is based on the value of the %% characteristic measured before the optical characteristic measuring device and the first line width (using the aforementioned line width measuring device The measured line width of the aforementioned first line pattern image is 2 and the width of the line pattern image is measured. The line width (because of the aforementioned second suppression, the use of the aforementioned image formation state adjustment device = 2 first learning characteristics (because of And the above-mentioned optical characteristics, so that the line width difference is affected If the effect is in accordance with the present invention, it can be measured by the line width measuring device, including the projection optical system, and the measurement system, respectively, on the second side ( The image plane and pattern (which are the i-th plane (the object extends in the same direction) and the second line graph formed by the projection light on the first plane (image plane) are here. Here, the line width measurement setup is used. (Line width, pattern orthogonal) The same-inside measurement on the objects arranged on 2 sides can also measure the transfer image (latent space) of the line width horizontal line pattern formed on the first image, photoresistance image, _image) The image is formed on the second surface. Let ’s say: the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern are controlled again. When the line width of the optical space image is used. When the scientific characteristics exist, it is based on the first installation: the amount: ... Is the difference (line width difference) between the sum of the first line width (19 1 line width (the second line pattern == the line width of the pattern image) and the line of Takarazuka) measured by the line width measuring device, Using the pico ^ UU4UU540 as a state adjustment device, the line width difference is affected by the optical characteristics of the brother 1 to make Le 2 learn the size of the characteristic first. Therefore, for example, / For example, it is easy to adjust the optical characteristics of the 2nd optical characteristics that are difficult to adjust for the first 2nd time! ::: Image formation state adjustment device to control the size of the 2 prior characteristics for control Control 帛! The aforementioned line width difference caused by the existence of optical characteristics. Projecting two or two energy beams to illuminate the pattern arranged on the first surface, and through the characteristics, it can achieve the right 4 access to the object arranged on the second surface The optical characteristics measurement device of Liangzhou Image 2 which measures the line width difference between the intersecting line pattern transfer images is to measure the aforementioned wavefront aberration measurement device. Next, the aforementioned first optical characteristic is developed by using the Buick polynomial system to measure the wavefront aberration measurement of τ Kexi ’s Zanikex order 4th order and the wavefront aberration series of Riley. The second optical characteristic is the aforementioned second order. :: = rotationally symmetric component term, front rotationally symmetric component term. In this case, the term of the symmetry component is the same as that of the second order component. Any of the terms 12 and 13 of the second order component is a 4th order 2Θ, which is the 9th item of the 4th order. The aforesaid rotationally symmetric component item of the fourth exposure device aerial image measuring device of the present invention measures a projection image which can also be included in a cutting width-measuring device, and the aforementioned respective pattern settings on the two sides of the line width measuring device It can also include a photographing device. It takes 20 200400540 to take an image of an object formed on the second surface. The fourth exposure nightmare of the present invention, a, > ^ ^ Second, the image formation state adjustment device is located at least i, at least i of one optical element, and = degree =, which constitute the aforementioned projection optical system. s weekly adjustment, adjustment of gas force in part of the optical path, the adjustment of the wavelength offset of the energy beam, and the aforementioned projection light of at least one of the pattern forming member and the aforementioned object regarding the aforementioned pattern: In the adjustment of the optical axis direction of the system, at least one adjustment is performed. From the perspective of the Uth point, this is a prediction method that predicts the characteristics of the pattern image by investing in an optical system. It is characterized by including the prediction = Cheng 'system, and according to the plural terms (including the formula using ㈣ , The aberration components obtained by expanding the wavefront aberration series of the above-mentioned four systems are calculated. Under the given exposure conditions, the variation curve is calculated (representing the predetermined projection through the projection optical system). The image of the pattern, the size of the aforementioned image, and the variation of the defocus amount from the optimal focus position) are used to predict the aforementioned variation curve based on the calculated movement. When transferring a pattern through a projection optical system, you can understand the pattern: Image: The size changes according to the amount of defocus from the optimal focus position of the transfer position, which indicates the change curve of the change (that is, the so-called CD _Focus Curve) changes due to wavefront aberrations of the projection optical system. In addition, the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system uses a predetermined formula (for example, Zernike polynomial) to further expand the series. 11 This can be decomposed in a plurality of search terms (aberration component terms). Based on the results of intensive research by the inventors, it can be understood that the values of the linear combination of the plural terms including the coefficients (ie, aberration components) of the above-mentioned check / gram terms, 21 200400540, and the image of the pattern projected through the projection optical system Kization of the aforementioned change curve (g 卩 'regard the defocus amount and the size of the pattern image as the coordinate system of each coordinate axis, the direction of the political focus and the parallel movement of the change curve of the image size direction)' There is a close relationship.
口此’右依本發明之預測方法的話,則利用上述之關 係’不必使用需要許多計算時間之複雜計算所帶來之成像 杈擬ϋ由非常單純之運算(求出分別包含像差成份之複數 ^ λ丨生、、Ό。之值)’在透過投影光學系統(處於既定像差狀 幻t既定曝光條件下,能用短時間來預測有關該圖案之 ♦焦曲線,根據該預測結果,能用短時間預測圖案之 投影像(或轉印像)之特性。 這種If況下’能進一步包含使所求出之變動曲線; 似高階函數之製程,其係在前,述預測製程之前,在前❾ :曝_下,假定前述投影光學系統中無像差之情則 j精由模擬來求出表示前述像之大小對前述散焦量餐 動之變動曲線。Say 'If you rely on the prediction method of the present invention, the above relationship is used.' It is not necessary to use the imaging branch caused by complex calculations that require a lot of calculation time. ^ λ, the value of 、, Ό, '' can be used to predict the focal curve of the pattern in a short time under the projection optical system (under a predetermined exposure condition of aberration), and according to the prediction result, Use a short time to predict the characteristics of the projected image (or transfer image) of the pattern. In this case, 'can further include the variation curve obtained; a process like a high-order function, which is described before, before the prediction process, In the case of front exposure: assuming that there is no aberration in the projection optical system, the precision curve j is obtained by simulation to indicate the change curve of the size of the image to the defocus amount.
錢種情況下,前述預測製程係根據前述各像差成 述既定曝光條件下’把前述各像差成份對前述邀 :於二度當?各係數)之線性結合,算出有關前述變動曲 述二ί焦里方向之移動量,根據前述各像差成份(係在 小變化少“一 达各像差成伤之平方對前述像 -化之感度當作各係數)平方 曲線之則述像大小變化方向之移動量。 如前述’變動曲線之移動能分解為有關表示散焦量 22In the case of money, the aforementioned forecasting process is based on the aforementioned aberrations under the predetermined exposure conditions, and the aforementioned aberration components are invited to the aforementioned: The coefficients are linearly combined to calculate the amount of movement in the direction of the two joules described above. According to the aforementioned aberration components (which are in small change and less, as soon as the square of each aberration is injured), Sensitivity is used as the coefficients) and the amount of movement in the direction of image size change is described in the square curve. As mentioned above, the movement of the 'variation curve' can be decomposed into the relevant defocus amount 22
20040U54U 轴方向(散焦量軸方向)曲線 ί十^ + 動、與有關表示圖宰傻夫 小之軸方向(像大小軸方向)之敕釭 口木像大 m ^ Λ 移動。有關散焦量軸方向之 k動曲線之移動,在展開 门之 德罢士八士 先予糸統之波面像差時之夂20040U54U The axis direction (the direction of the defocus amount axis) curve ί 10 ^ + movement, and the relevant representation of the figure Zai Fool small axis direction (like the direction of the large and small axes) 敕 釭 Mouth wood image large m ^ Λ moves. The movement of the k-motion curve in the direction of the defocus amount axis is the time when the wavefront aberration of the system is given in advance.
像差成份中,有感度,藉由 了之D 、目丨I #妙4曰 彳冢差成份之線性結合,能預 測该移動量。又,有關像大 此預 欠推至α、 之轴方向變動曲線之移動在 各像差成份之平方中,有璣声,— 砂動在 叫处人 以度错由各像差成份平方之岭 性…d ’能預測該移動量。 w 勺八ί㈣情況下,前述預測製程係根據前述各交又項(係 包含則述各像差成份平方之線 (知 牛二:述既定曝光條件下之前述像之大小變化之方向 之=此相異之像差成份彼此間之交又項之感度作為各個 變化之移之:二結合,㈣關前述變動曲線之前述像大小 有關像大小軸方向之變動曲绩 成份平方古“ 欠動曲線之移動,不僅在各像差 成伤千方有感度’而且在彼此相異之像差成份彼此間之交 又項中也有感度’若進一步考慮這些交又項之線性結合的 洁’就能進-步高精度地預測像大小轴方向之移動量。 項所明之預測方法中,前述高階函數係只由偶數階 項所構成之函數。 …在本發明之預測方法中,前述預測製程係根據分別包 含别料像差成份之複數項之線性結合,算出前述變動曲 ,之前述波面像差所起因之變形情況,根據前述移動量及 前述變形情況,能預測前述變動曲線。在這種情況 僅能算出變動曲線之移動量’並且根據包含各像差成份項 23 200400540 之線性結合,也能算出投影光學系統之波面像差 變動料之變形情況,能更高精度地預測變動曲線。口之 在每種情況下,在前述預測製程 所求出之變動曲竣折似* ,比 适 乂包含使 X動曲線近似円階函數之製程,其係在 2、]、件下,假定前述投影光學系統無像差 2 由模擬來求出表示前述像 欠出,错 曲線。 31像之大小對别述散焦量變動之變動 在這種情況下,在前述預測製程之前,進一步包A曾 裝程,係透過實際像差狀態之前述投影光學系统,= 述既定曝光條件下,算出有關被投影之前述圖幸像之= 變動曲線之變二下Γ屮 差所… 量所移動之Μ 函數(係使根據前述移動 製r所ϋ屮 )與差份函數(係表示用前述算出 I ^所求出之變動曲線函數之差份)。 在這種情況下,前述算出製程係藉由模擬來進行。 像差:Γ明之:測方法係在前述預測製程中,在前述波面 ε:之别述變動曲線之變動情況下,求出高階函數( 係㈣前述移動量所移動之變動曲線近似)與差份 前述算出製程所求出之變動曲線函數之差份)時,( 二==前述各像差成份(係在前述既定曝光條 下將則述各像差成份之平方對前述差份函 度當作各係數)平方之線性結合,算出有闕前述^ 既數階項之係數’根據前述各像差成份(係在前述 疋a條件下,將前述各像差成份對前述差份函數之奇 24 200400540 數階項之感度當作各係數)之線性結合,算出前述差份函數 % 之該奇數階項之係數。在這種情況下,表示變動函數之變 形情況之差份函數之偶數階項之係數,在展開投影光學系 統之波面像差時之各像差成份平方中,有感度,藉由各像 差成份平方之線性結合,能預測該係數。又,差份函數之 奇數階項之係數在各像差成份中,有感度,藉由各像差成 份之線性結合’能預測該係數。因此,關於變動曲線之變 形情況,係使用包含投影光學系統之波面像差之各像差成 份項之線性結合等,能用短時間且高精度地進行預測。 _ 本發明之預測方法,前述既定之式係查涅克多項式, 前述各像差成份係各查涅克項之係數。 若從第12觀點來看的話,本發明係第丨評價方法,係 透過投影光學系統來評價圖案像特性,其特徵在於,包含Among the aberration components, there is sensitivity, and the amount of movement can be predicted by the linear combination of the D, 丨 丨 I # 妙 4, 彳 tsuka difference components. In addition, the movement of the curve of the axial direction of the image is reduced to the square of each aberration component, and there is a snoring sound. — Sand movement is called by people to the degree of error by the square of each aberration component. Sex ... d 'can predict this amount of movement. w In the case of a spoon, the aforementioned forecasting process is based on the foregoing terms (including the line of the square of each aberration component (known as Niu II: the direction of the change in the size of the aforementioned image under the given exposure conditions) = this The difference between the different aberration components and the sensitivity of each item is taken as the shift of each change: the second combination is to close the aforementioned image size of the aforementioned change curve, and the change in the direction of the magnitude axis of the image. Moving, there is sensitivity not only in the aberrations of various aberrations, but also in the intersection of aberration components that are different from each other. There is also a sensitivity 'If you further consider the linear combination of these intersections, you can enter- The amount of movement in the direction of the image axis is accurately predicted step by step. In the prediction method described in the item, the aforementioned high-order function is a function composed of even-order terms only. In the prediction method of the present invention, the aforementioned prediction process is based on The linear combination of the plural terms of the aberration components is calculated to calculate the aforementioned variation curve, and the deformation caused by the aforementioned wavefront aberration can be predicted according to the aforementioned movement amount and the aforementioned deformation. Measure the aforementioned variation curve. In this case, only the amount of movement of the variation curve can be calculated ', and according to the linear combination of each aberration component term 23 200400540, the deformation of the wavefront aberration variation material of the projection optical system can also be calculated, which can be more Predict the variation curve with high accuracy. In each case, the variation curve obtained in the aforementioned prediction process seems to be broken *, and the ratio is suitable to include a process that approximates the X-motion curve to a order function, which is at 2. ], It is assumed that the aforesaid projection optical system has no aberration 2 and is calculated by simulation to indicate that the aforementioned image is underdeveloped and wrong. 31 The variation of the size of the image with respect to the variation in the defocus amount is different in this case. Before the manufacturing process, further package A has been installed, which is through the aforementioned projection optical system of the actual aberration state = under the given exposure conditions, to calculate the fortunate image of the aforementioned image being projected = the variation of the variation curve Γ 屮… The M function (which is calculated according to the aforementioned moving system r) and the difference function (which represents the difference of the curve function obtained by calculating I ^ as described above). In this case The aforementioned calculation process is performed by simulation. Aberration: Γ Mingzhi: The measurement method is to obtain a higher-order function (in the aforementioned movement amount) in the case of the aforementioned wavefront ε: variation of the other curve in the prediction process. When the movement curve is approximated) and the difference between the movement curve function obtained by the calculation process described above), (2 == each of the aberration components (under the predetermined exposure bar, the aberration components will be described below) The square of the function of the difference is regarded as the coefficients. The linear combination of the squares is calculated to calculate the coefficients with the aforementioned ^ the first order term. According to the aforementioned aberration components (under the conditions of 疋 a above, the aforementioned aberrations are calculated). The sensitivity of the component to the aforementioned difference function is the linear combination of the 24th of the 200400540 order terms as the coefficients) to calculate the coefficient of the odd order term of the aforementioned difference function%. In this case, it represents the deformation of the variation function. The coefficients of the even-order terms of the difference function have sensitivity in the square of each aberration component when the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system is expanded, and can be predicted by the linear combination of the squares of each aberration component. Number. The coefficients of the odd-order terms of the difference function have sensitivity in each aberration component, and the coefficient can be predicted by the linear combination of the aberration components. Therefore, the deformation of the variation curve can be predicted in a short time and with high accuracy by using a linear combination of aberration component terms including wavefront aberrations of the projection optical system. _ In the prediction method of the present invention, the aforementioned predetermined formula is a Zernike polynomial, and the aforementioned aberration components are coefficients of each Zernike term. From the perspective of the twelfth aspect, the present invention is the first evaluation method, which evaluates the characteristics of a pattern image through a projection optical system, and is characterized in that it includes
預測製程,係4十對前述投影光學系、统之有效視野内之 至少1個量測點,使用本發明之_方法,在既定曝光條 件下,透過前述投影光學系統,來預測變動曲線(係表示有 關投影在前述至少1個量測點之既定圖案像,前述像大小 對來自最佳聚焦位置之散焦量之變動);以及 評價製程 案像之特性。 係根據前述預測結果,來評價前述既定圖 若依第1評價方法的話, 效視野内之至少1個量測點, 線(係有關使用本發明之預測方 則能針對投影光學系統之有 能高精度地預測上述變動曲 法’在既定曝光條件下,透 25 200400540 過投影光學系統所投影之既定圖案像),故根據該變動曲 ,能高精度地評價投影光學系統之有效視 … 像之特性。 之既疋圖案 在這種情況下,前述既定圖案係對應前述投影光學系 、、充之有效視野内之各複數個量測點來配置,前述特性勺、 含前述投影光學系統之有效視野内之前述像之均勻性/、匕 本發明之第1評價方法,前述既定圖案係包含 =之::與前述投影光學系統之光軸方向正交之平面二 -置之彼此正交’前述預測製程能在各前 前述變動曲線。 q木,預測 在這種情況下,前述評價方法,就前述像之特 ’能評價線圖案像彼此之線寬差。這種情形,在至吕 性而言,例如,能評價主要因像散: 斤k成之正父之2個線圖案彼此之線寬差。 至於本發明之第1評價 係與前述—統:::== 案二::::交’前述預物係能在一圖 在這種情況下,前述評僧制 之唆盲# U ”貝“王係能評價線圖案像彼此 前述像特性。這種情形,能評價主要因· /象差所4之線寬異常值等來作為前述像特性。- 調整= 二?點來看的話,本發明係第1調整方法,係 光學系統之圖案像之形成狀態,其特徵在於 26 200400540 、、、製程係使用本發明之第1評價方法,來評價對 應刖述扠影光學系統之有效視野内之至少1個量測點所配 置之既定圖案像之特性;以及 口製程係根據前述評價結果,透過前述投影光學 系統,來調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。 右依第1調整方法的話,則使用本發明第1評價方法 ,汗彳貝投影光學系統之有效視野内之至少1個量測點之既 囷案像特丨生’根據該評價結果,透過前述投影光學系統 來凋整既定圖案像之形成狀態。因此,根據評價結果,能籲 將既定圖案像之特性調整在所欲狀態。 在化種情況下,前述調整製程係使用 调整參數之每單位調整量之前述各像差成份之變化量 ’其係调整有關前述量測點之前述既定圖案像之形成狀態 9 前述各像差成份對前述既定圖案像大小變化之感度; 以及 ~ X ’ 有關變動曲線之各階項係數之目標值之偏離,其係表 _ 不刖述既定圖案像之大小對前述散焦量之變動; 开出如述5周整參數之調整量,根據所算出之調整量, 來調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。 Ϊ測點之變動曲線係受投影光學系統之像差等影響而 變化。因此,若調整投影光學系統等,使像差成份變化的 洁,則能使該量測點之變動曲線趨近所欲曲線(目標)。此 處,本發明係使用 27 200400540 該調整 量; 參數之每單位調整量之前述各像差成份之變化 在前述既定曝光條件下,前述各像差成份對前述既定 圖案像大小變化之感度; 有關變動曲線之各階項係數之目標值之偏離,其係表 不前述既定圖案像大小對前述散焦量之變動; /出取消量測點之變動曲線與所欲曲線之偏離所需要 之调整參數(係調整圖牵傻夕# # 旦 门1 口茶像之形成狀態之調整參數)之調整 ® ’根據所算出之調整量,夾坰敕乂 朴 门4•里术舞整别述既定圖案像之形成 狀恶。猎此,能調整圖案像 料與也曰 口系像之幵/成狀恶,以使圖案像大小 、放“、、:E之變動曲線趨近所欲之變動曲線。 這種清形’要將所欲曲線( 赂七b M目“)形成哪種曲線,係因 斤求出之圖案像之調整項目 係八s,丨4細 ,、例如,前述評價製程 ’、刀別砰知對應各前述投影光學李 個旦、日I ^ /兀予糸統之有效視野内之複數 里測點所配置之既定圖荦傻 有關前m ㈣像之特性,前述調整製程係使 ’關則述變動曲線之同一階 間相π 、’、之目標值在前述量測點 閩相冋。這種情形,能提高 圖幸#> & 门仅〜先學糸統之有效視野内之 圓案像之面内均勻性。又,當 ,能為二、+、回 疋圖案包含複數個圖案時 月匕在則述圖案間,使有關前 數之目庐括4 1文動曲線之同一階項之係 之目^值相同。這種情形’例如,处座 像盥;);至綠罔也 犯儘可能將縱線圖案 课與榣線圖案像之線寬、或平 整相同。 固案像彼此間之線寬等調 本發明之第1調整方法係使 調整量。 取小平方法來求出前述 28 200400540 饒點束看的話,本發明係第4曝光方法,俜 透過投影光學系統,將笛丨^ L 尤万法係 上所㈣4 弟面上之電路圖案轉印在第】面 上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含: 調整製程,係使用本發明之第"周整方法 投影光學系統,調整前述圖案圖像之形成狀態,·以及 投影= =,::=整像之形成狀態下, —予=,,先將則述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 故 :依弟4曝光方法的話,則使用本發明之第1調整方 影光學系統’調整電路圖案像之形成狀態,在 f调整像之形成狀態下,因電路圖案係轉印在物體上 能將该電路圖案高精度形成在物體上。 若從第15觀點來看的話,本發明係第❻價方法 包 係評價透過投影光學系統之圖案像特性,其特徵在於 含: ' 取得前述投影光學系統之波面像差資訊之製程; 取得有關前述圖案之投影像資訊之製程;以及 、評價製程,係考慮查淫克感度對前述投影像(其係使用 查涅克多項式’將前述波面像差級數展開之複數個查涅克 項中,其相互作用對前述投影像特性影響之任意查^克項 組合之交叉項之前述投影像特性之變化)之特性變化,來評 價前述圖案像特性。 若依第2評價方法的話,則能得到投影光學系統之波 面像差資訊,進一步得到有關圖案投影像之資訊。並且, 根據這些資訊’在使用查淫克將前述波面像差級數展複數 29 個查沒克項中’在該相 意查涅克項組合之交又頊別,L又影像特性影響之任 X貝中,考處杳、、g古 像特性之變化,來_ 心一 /里克感度對前述投影 評價方法中,二:Γ像之特性。即,在該第2 特性影響之任意查淫克項心用對前述投影像 感度對前述投$ # Μ π 又員中,因考慮查涅克 ,故能f古拌木汗仏别述圖案像之特性 月匕更同精度评價圖案像之特性。The prediction process is based on 40 pairs of the aforementioned projection optics and at least one measurement point within the effective field of view. Using the method of the present invention, under a given exposure condition, the variation curve is predicted through the aforementioned projection optics (system Represents the predetermined pattern image projected on the at least one measurement point, and the change of the image size to the defocus amount from the optimal focus position); and the characteristics of the evaluation process image. It is based on the aforementioned prediction results to evaluate the predetermined map according to the first evaluation method. At least one measurement point in the effective field of view. The line (for the prediction using the present invention can be aimed at the high performance of the projection optical system. Precisely predicting the above-mentioned variation curve method 'under a given exposure condition, the image of a predetermined pattern projected by a projection optical system is transmitted through 25 200400540. Therefore, based on this variation curve, it is possible to accurately evaluate the effective vision of the projection optical system ... . In this case, the predetermined pattern is arranged corresponding to the plurality of measurement points in the effective field of view of the projection optical system, and the characteristic spoon and the effective field of view of the projection optical system are included. The uniformity of the aforementioned image / and the first evaluation method of the present invention, the predetermined pattern includes = :: a plane orthogonal to the optical axis direction of the projection optical system-two orthogonal to each other-the aforementioned prediction process performance The above-mentioned variation curve. Q. Prediction In this case, the aforementioned evaluation method can evaluate the difference in line width between line pattern images with respect to the characteristics of the aforementioned image. In this case, in terms of true characteristics, for example, it can be evaluated that the main cause is astigmatism: the difference between the line widths of the two line patterns of the father of Jin Cheng. As for the first evaluation system of the present invention and the above-mentioned system :: === Case 2 ::::: 'The aforementioned predecessor system can be shown in a picture. In this case, the aforementioned evaluation system of the blind monk #U ”贝"The king can evaluate the aforementioned image characteristics of the line pattern images. In this case, it is possible to evaluate the line width anomaly value mainly due to the aberration 4 as the aforementioned image characteristics. -Adjustment = 2? From the point of view, the present invention is the first adjustment method, which is the formation state of the pattern image of the optical system. It is characterized by 26 200400540, and the manufacturing process uses the first evaluation method of the present invention to evaluate the corresponding description of the cross shadow optical The characteristics of the predetermined pattern image configured by at least one measurement point in the effective field of view of the system; and the manufacturing process adjusts the formation state of the predetermined pattern image through the projection optical system according to the evaluation result. If the first adjustment method is based on the right, then using the first evaluation method of the present invention, the existing case image feature of at least one measurement point in the effective field of view of the Khanbei projection optical system is based on the evaluation result, through the foregoing The projection optical system adjusts the formation state of a predetermined pattern image. Therefore, based on the evaluation results, it is possible to adjust the characteristics of a predetermined pattern image to a desired state. In the case of a variety, the aforementioned adjustment process uses an amount of change of the aforementioned aberration components per unit adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter, which adjusts the formation state of the aforementioned predetermined pattern image about the aforementioned measurement points. 9 The aforementioned aberration components Sensitivity to the change in the size of the aforementioned predetermined pattern image; and the deviation of the target values of the coefficients of the respective order terms of the relevant curve of X ', which is not to describe the change of the size of the predetermined pattern image to the aforementioned defocus amount; The adjustment amount of the 5-week integer parameter is described, and the formation state of the predetermined pattern image is adjusted according to the calculated adjustment amount. The change curve of the measurement point is affected by the aberration of the projection optical system. Therefore, if the projection optical system is adjusted so that the aberration component changes, the variation curve of the measurement point can be brought closer to the desired curve (target). Here, the present invention uses the adjustment amount of 27 200400540; the change of the aforementioned aberration components per unit adjustment amount of the parameter Under the aforementioned predetermined exposure conditions, the sensitivity of the aforementioned respective aberration components to changes in the aforementioned predetermined pattern image size; related The deviation of the target value of the coefficient of each order of the variation curve represents the variation of the aforementioned predetermined pattern image size to the aforementioned defocus amount; / The adjustment parameters required for the deviation of the variation curve of the measurement point from the desired curve (系 调整 图 图 傻傻 夕 # # Adjustment of the formation state of the danmen 1 mouth tea image) (adjustment parameters) ® 'According to the calculated adjustment amount, pinch Pu door 4 Formation of evil. Hunting this, the pattern image and the mouth-shaped image can be adjusted to make the shape / evil of the image, so that the size of the pattern image, the ",": E curve close to the desired curve. This clear shape 'will What kind of curve is formed by the desired curve (brief 7 b M mesh "), the adjustment items of the pattern image obtained due to the weight are eight seconds, 4 fine, for example, the aforementioned evaluation process, and the knife do not correspond to each of the foregoing Projection optics Li Gedan, Japanese I ^ / Wu Yu 糸 system of the fixed number of points arranged in the effective field of view of the predetermined map 荦 silly related to the characteristics of the front m 前述 image, the aforementioned adjustment process is to make the Guan The target values of the phases π, ', in the same order are at the aforementioned measurement points. In this case, the in-plane uniformity of the circular image in the effective field of view of the first learning system can be improved. In addition, when the two, +, and Uighur patterns contain a plurality of patterns, the moon dagger is between the patterns, so that the items of the first order include the same order of the items of the 1st verbal motion curve ^ value. . In this case ’, for example, the seat is like a toilet;); to green 罔 also commits to make the vertical line pattern lesson as flat as possible with the line width or flat line pattern. Adjusting the line widths of the fixed images, etc. The first adjustment method of the present invention uses an adjustment amount. Take the Xiaoping method to find the aforementioned 28 200400540. If you look at the point beam, the present invention is the fourth exposure method. Through the projection optical system, the circuit pattern on the 4th surface of the flute on the flute is transferred to the The object arranged on the first surface is characterized in that it includes: an adjustment process, which uses the " rounding method of the present invention to project the optical system, adjust the formation state of the aforementioned pattern image, and projection == ,: : = In the state where the whole image is formed, — 予 =, first transfer the circuit pattern described above to the aforementioned object. Therefore, according to the exposure method of the 4th, the first adjustment of the shadow optical system of the present invention is used to adjust the formation state of the circuit pattern image. In the formation state of the f adjustment image, the circuit pattern can be transferred to the object because the circuit pattern is transferred to the object. This circuit pattern is formed on an object with high accuracy. From the perspective of the fifteenth aspect, the present invention is the first method to evaluate the characteristics of the pattern image through the projection optical system, which is characterized by: 'the process of obtaining the wavefront aberration information of the aforementioned projection optical system; The process of projecting the projection image information of the pattern; and the evaluation process is to consider the sensation sensitivity to the aforementioned projection image (which uses the Zernike polynomial 'to expand the wavefront aberration series of the plurality of Zernike terms, which The change in the characteristics of the projection image of the cross-term of any combination of cross-term terms that affects the characteristics of the projection image to evaluate the aforementioned pattern image characteristics. According to the second evaluation method, the wavefront aberration information of the projection optical system can be obtained, and further information about the pattern projection image can be obtained. In addition, according to these information, 'in the use of Chasing grams to expand the aforementioned wavefront aberration series to a plurality of 29 Chawkin terms', at the intersection of the combination of the desired Chaniek terms, L and the influence of image characteristics In X Bei, the changes in the characteristics of the ancient images of 杳, g are examined, and the _ Xinyi / Rick sensitivity of the aforementioned projection evaluation method, two: the characteristics of the Γ image. That is to say, in the case of arbitrary investigations on the influence of the second characteristic, the sensitivity of the aforementioned projection image to the aforementioned projection is # # Μ π and the member, because of the consideration of Zanek, it is possible to use a different pattern image. The characteristics of the moon dagger are more accurate than the characteristics of the pattern image.
在這種情況下,當前述R 旦A j4圖案係包含線圖案時,前述投 〜像特性係包含該線圖案之線寬。 若從第16觀點炎4 μ k , #坰敕 ‘ 、S ,則本發明之第2調整方法, 係凋整透過投影光學系統之 於,包含: 3案像Μ絲怨,其特徵在 —評價製程’係使用本發明第2評價方法,來評價對 則錢影光學系統之有效視野内之至少1個量測點所配 之既定圖案像之特性;以及 凋整製程,係根據前述評價結果,In this case, when the aforementioned R denier A j4 pattern includes a line pattern, the aforementioned image characteristics include the line width of the line pattern. From the 16th point of view, 4 μk, # 坰 敕 ', S, the second adjustment method of the present invention, which passes through the projection optical system, includes: 3 cases like M Si, which is characterized by- The manufacturing process is to use the second evaluation method of the present invention to evaluate the characteristics of a predetermined pattern image assigned to at least one measurement point in the effective field of view of the Qianying optical system;
統,來調整前錢定圖案像之形餘態。 …、 若依第2凋整方法的話,則使用本發明之第2評價方 法,能高精度評價對應投影光學系統之有效視野内之至少 1個量測點所配置之既定圖案像特性,根據該評價結果, 透過投影光學系統,調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。因 此,根據評價結果,圖案像之形成狀態能調整最佳。 若從第1 7觀點來看的話,則本發明係第5種曝光方法 ,係透過投影光學系統,將第1面上之圖案轉印在第2面 30 200400540 上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含: 調整製程,係使用申請專利_第 透過投影光學“,來職前述圖案像之形成狀^法及’ 轉印製程,係在前述調整像之形 ’透 投影:學系統,將前述圖案轉印在前述物體上。別述 、右從弟18觀點來看的話,則本發明係—種 透過投影光學系統,用電腦來 " 特徵在於, 丁《案像特性之預測,其 波面= 复數項(包含使用既定式,將前述投影光學系統之 口以級數展開所得到之各像差成份)之線性結合, 在既疋曝光條件下,透過前述 投影之既定圖案像,表干ιΓ 算出有關所 焦仿署Μ : 乂別述像之大小對來自前述最佳聚 I移勤ί政焦量之變動之變動曲線之前述波面像差所起因 移動H前述電腦來執行根據前述所算出之移動量, 來預測前述變動曲線之預測程序。 〜只要該程式安裝在電腦中’電腦便執行上述各程序。 =此’本發明之預測方法係藉由電腦來執行。因此,與前 Ζ樣,不使用需要龐大計算時間之複雜計算所帶來之成 焉擬’藉由非常單純之運算(求出分別包含像差成份之複 系員之線I·生結合值)’在透過處於既定像差狀態之投影光學 隹、先之既疋曝光條件下,能在短時間内來預測有關⑶聚 二曲線’根據其結果,能在短時間内來預測圖案之轉印特 1 生 〇 在這種情況下,在前述預測程序之前,假定前述投影 31 200400540 :學:統無像差時’進一步用前述電腦來執行使變動曲線( ::刖述像大小對前述散焦量之變動)趨近於高階函數之程 t這種情況下’前述預測程序係使前述電腦 之程序·· 其係根據前述各像差成份(其係在前述既定曝光條件下 ,將前速各像差成份對前述散焦量之感度當作各係數)之線System to adjust the shape of the former Qianding pattern image. ... If the second dimming method is used, the second evaluation method of the present invention can be used to accurately evaluate the predetermined pattern image characteristics of at least one measurement point corresponding to the effective field of view of the projection optical system. As a result of the evaluation, the formation state of the predetermined pattern image was adjusted through the projection optical system. Therefore, based on the evaluation results, the formation state of the pattern image can be optimally adjusted. From a 17th point of view, the present invention is the fifth exposure method. The pattern on the first surface is transferred to an object arranged on the second surface 30 200400540 through a projection optical system. Its characteristics It consists of: The adjustment process is based on the application of the patent _ the first through the projection optics ", the formation of the aforementioned pattern image ^ method and the 'transfer process, is based on the shape of the aforementioned adjustment image' through projection: learning system, the aforementioned The pattern is transferred on the aforementioned object. Let alone, from the perspective of Brother 18, the present invention is a computer through a projection optical system " is characterized by the prediction of the characteristics of the case image, its wavefront = The linear combination of a plurality of terms (including the aberration components obtained by expanding the mouth of the aforementioned projection optical system by a series using a predetermined formula), and under the existing exposure conditions, the predetermined pattern image of the aforementioned projection is used to calculate Regarding the focal imitation department M: the cause of the aforementioned wavefront aberration of the variation curve of the size of the described image to the variation from the aforementioned best focus shift amount of political focus, the aforementioned computer is moved according to the aforementioned The amount of movement is used to predict the prediction procedure of the aforementioned variation curve. ~ As long as the program is installed in a computer, the computer executes the above-mentioned procedures. = This' The prediction method of the present invention is executed by a computer. In this way, instead of using the complicated calculations that require a large amount of calculation time to mimic 'through a very simple operation (to find the line I · generation combination values of the complex members that each contain aberration components)' The projection optics of the aberration state can be used to predict the relevant CD-curve curve in a short time under the exposure conditions. Based on the results, the pattern transfer characteristics can be predicted in a short time. In this case, before the aforementioned prediction procedure, it is assumed that the aforementioned projection 31 200400540: Learning: When there is no aberration, 'the computer is used to further execute the variation curve (:: the change in the image size to the aforementioned defocus amount). In the case of the high-order function t, the aforementioned prediction program is a program that uses the aforementioned computer. It is based on the aforementioned aberration components (which are the front-speed images under the predetermined exposure conditions). As a component of each coefficient) of the line of the defocus amount of the sensitivity dispersion
性結合,來預測有關前述變動曲線之散焦量方向之移 的程序;以及 其係«前述各像差成份(其係在前述既㈣光條件下 ,將前述各像差成料前述像A小變化之感度當作各係數) 平方之線性結合,來預測有關前述變動曲線之前述像大小 之變化方向之移動量的程序。 本發明之程式,前述預測程序係使前述電腦執行下列 程序,其係包含前述各像差成份平方之線性結合,根據前 述各交又項(其係在前述既定曝光條件τ,將彼此相異像差Procedure for predicting the shift of the defocus amount direction of the aforementioned variation curve; The sensitivity of change is treated as a linear combination of coefficients and squares to predict the amount of movement in the direction of change of the aforementioned image size of the aforementioned change curve. In the program of the present invention, the aforementioned prediction program causes the aforementioned computer to execute the following procedure, which includes the linear combination of the squares of the aberration components described above. difference
成伤彼此間之又又項對刚述像大小之變化當作各係數)之線 性結合’來預測有關前述變動曲線之前述像大小變化方向 之移動量的程序。 本發明之程式,前述高階函數係僅由偶數階項所構成 之函數。 本發明之程式,前述預測程序係根據分別包含之前述 各像差成份複數項之線性結合,來算出前述變動曲線起因 於刖述波面像差之變形狀況,根據前述移動量及前述變形 32 200400540 狀況,使電腦執行預測前述變數曲線的程序。 在這種I"月況下,在前述預測程序之前,進一步‘ 電腦執行算出程序,其係在前述既定曝光條件下,假= 則述投影光學系統無像差之情形下求出,使表示前述 小對前述散焦量之變動之變動曲線趨近於高階函數。 在攻種情況下,在前述預測步驟之前,進一步用 ,腦來執行算出程序,其係在前述既Μ光條件下,= 貫際像差狀態之前述投影光學系统,算出有關所投影之^ 定圖案像’前述像大小對前述散焦量之變動。 前述預測程序係用前述電腦來執行求出高階函數 據前述移動量來移動)與變動函數(其偏上述算出步料 求出)之差份函數,來作為前述波面像差所起因之前述 曲線之變動情況的程序。 在這種情況下,前述預測程序係用前述電腦來 下之程序, 根據前述各像差成份(在前述既定曝光條件下,將前述 各像差成份平方對前述差份函數之偶數階項之感度當二各 係數)平方之線性結合,來預測前述前述差份函數之該偶數 階項之係數的程序;以及 根據W述各像差成份(在前述既定曝光條件下,將前述 各像差成份對前述差份函數之奇數階項之感度當作各係數) 之線性結合,來預測前述前述差份函數之該奇數階項之係 數的程序。 ' $ 本發明之程式 前述既定之式係查涅克多項式,前述 33 200400540 各像差成份係各查涅克項之係數。 、本發明之程式,在記錄於資訊記錄媒體之狀態下,能 作為販f等對象。因此,若從第19 1點來看的話,則本 發明之程式係藉由所記錄之電腦來讀取之資訊記錄媒體。 4又,若從第20觀點來看的話,本發明係一種曝光裝置 之製造方法,係、製造曝光裝置,透過投影光學系統,將形 f在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體上;其係包含使用本發明之It is a procedure for predicting the amount of movement of the image size change direction of the aforementioned change curve by linear combination of the changes in the size of the image just described as each coefficient). In the program of the present invention, the aforementioned higher-order function is a function composed of only even-order terms. In the program according to the present invention, the aforementioned prediction program is based on the linear combination of the plural terms of the aberration components respectively included to calculate the deformation state of the variation curve due to the wavefront aberration described above. To make the computer execute the program for predicting the aforementioned variable curve. In this I " monthly condition, before the aforementioned prediction procedure, the computer further executes a calculation procedure, which is obtained under the aforementioned predetermined exposure conditions, and false = the projection optical system is obtained without aberration, so that the aforementioned The variation curve of the small variation of the aforementioned defocus amount approaches a higher-order function. In the case of the attack, before the aforementioned prediction step, the brain is further used to execute the calculation program, which is the aforementioned projection optical system under the above-mentioned light condition, = the state of the transversal aberration, to calculate the projection related Pattern image 'The variation of the aforementioned image size with respect to the aforementioned defocus amount. The prediction program uses the computer to execute the difference function of obtaining the higher-order function data and the moving amount) and the variation function (which is obtained by calculating from the above calculation steps) as the difference of the curve caused by the wavefront aberration. Procedures for changes. In this case, the aforementioned prediction program is a program executed by the aforementioned computer, and based on the respective aberration components (under the predetermined exposure conditions, the sensitivity of the square of each aberration component to the even-order term of the difference function is described). A procedure for predicting the coefficient of the even-order term of the aforementioned difference function when the linear combination of the squares of the two respective coefficients); and according to the aforementioned aberration components (under the aforementioned predetermined exposure conditions, A procedure for predicting the coefficients of the odd-order terms of the aforementioned difference function as a linear combination of the sensitivity of the odd-order terms of the aforementioned difference function as each coefficient). '$ The formula of the present invention The aforementioned formula is a Zernike polynomial, and the aforementioned 33 200400540 each aberration component is a coefficient of each Zernike term. The program of the present invention can be used as an object for sale in a state of being recorded on an information recording medium. Therefore, if viewed from point 191, the program of the present invention is an information recording medium read by a recorded computer. 4. Furthermore, from the perspective of the 20th aspect, the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing an exposure device. The invention relates to a method for manufacturing an exposure device. A projection optical system is used to transfer a pattern in the shape of a hood on an object. Use of the invention
第1〜3投影光學系統之調整方法之任一方&,來調整前 述投影光學系統之製程。 又,在微影製程中,係使用本發明第丨〜第4曝光裝 置2任一裝置來進行曝光,能將圖案高精度形成在物體上 ,藉此,能高良率製造更高積體度之微元件,能提高其生 產性。同樣地,在微影製程中,係使用本發明第丨〜第5 曝光方法之任—方法來進行曝光’藉此能將圖案高精度形 成在物體上,藉此,能高良率製造更高積體度之微元件,Any one of the first to third methods of adjusting the projection optical system & adjusts the manufacturing process of the aforementioned projection optical system. In the photolithography process, exposure is performed using any of the fourth to fourth exposure apparatuses 2 of the present invention, and a pattern can be formed on an object with high accuracy, thereby making it possible to produce a higher integration rate with a high yield. Micro components can improve their productivity. Similarly, in the lithography process, exposure is performed by using any one of the fifth to fifth exposure methods of the present invention—the method can be used to form a pattern on an object with high accuracy, thereby making it possible to produce a higher product with a high yield. Body microelements,
能提高其生產性。因此,若從其他觀點來看的話,本發明 係使用本發明第1〜第4曝光裝置之任一裝置之元件製造 方法,或使用本發明第丨〜第5曝光方法之任一方法之元 件製造方法。 【實施方式】 以下,根據第1圖〜第12圖,說明本發明之一實施形 態。 第1圖係表示一實施形態之曝光裝置丨⑻之概略構成 34 200400540 口亥曝光裝Ϊ 1GG係、在曝光用光源(以下,稱為「光源」) + ’使用脈衝雷射光源之步進掃描方式之縮小投影曝光裝 置(所謂掃描器)。 曝光裝置100係備有:照明系統(其係由光源16及照 明光學系統12所構成)、標線片台RST(其係當作遮光罩台 ’保持當作遮光罩之標線片纟R,係藉由來自該照明系統 之能:ϊ束之曝光用照明光EL來照明)、投影光學系統pL( 其係將從標線片R射出之曝光用照明光el投射在當作物 體之曰曰圓上(像面上))、晶圓台WST(保持晶目w)、及這些 控制糸統。 就前述光源16而言,此處係使用KrF準分子雷射(輸 出波長為248nm)。又,祙本、、盾! &二丄 t 就尤,原1 6而吕,也可使用輸出F2 雷射(輸出波長為157nm)或ArF帛分子雷射(輸出波長為 1 93nm)等真空紫外線領域之脈衝紫外光源。 $述光源1 6,實際上,容納曝光裝置(由照明光學系 統12之各構成要素及標線片台RST、投影光學系統pL、 以及晶圓台WS 丁等所構成)本體之室u係設置在與所設置 之潔淨室另外潔淨度低之服務室,其係透過至少一部份包 含未圖示之送光用光學系統,將稱為光束匹配單元光轴調 整用光學系統連接在室η中。該光源16係根據來自主控 制裝置50之控制資訊TS,藉由内部之控制器,來控制雷 射光束LB輸出之開/關、雷射光束LB之i脈衝之=量田 振盪頻率(重#頻率)、中心波長及頻譜半值寬(波長寬)等。 刖述照明光學系統i 2 ’具備··光束整形照度均勻化光 35 200400540 學系統20(包含柱型透鏡、光束放大器( ν σσ ^未圖示)及光學積 为益(均質器)22等)、照明系統開口光圈板24、第^中繼 透鏡28A、第2中繼透鏡28B、固定標線片遮簾嫩、可 動標線片遮簾30B、光程彎曲用反射鏡M及聚光透鏡Μ 專。又,就光學積分器而言,能使用複眼透鏡、桿型積分 ^内面反射型積分器)、或繞射光學元件等。因本實㈣ 故以下也稱為複 悲係使用複眼透鏡來作為光學積分器22, 眼透鏡22。 前述光束整形/照度均勻化光學系統2〇,係透過設置 籲 在室11 t光透過窗17,連接在未圖示之送光用光學系統 。該光束整形/照度均勻化光學系統20,例如,係使用柱 型透鏡或光束放大器,將用光源16透過脈衝發光之光透 過窗17所射入之雷射光束LB之截面形狀加以整型。又’ 在該光束整形/照度均勻化光學系統2〇中,雷射光束 係經由能量粗調器(未圖示,備有ND濾波器,能等比級數 地用複數階段或連續變更透射率)、可交換配置之複數個繞 射光學元件、沿著照明光學系統光軸之可動稜鏡(圓錐稜鏡 籲 、多面體稜鏡等)、及光學單元(未圖示,其係包含變焦光 學系統之至少1個),到達先學積分器22。上述光學單元 係當光學積分器22為複眼透鏡時,可變化該射入面上之 照明光之強度分布,當光學積分器22為内面反射型積分 器時,可變化照明光對該射入面之射入角廣範圍等,藉此 變更照明光學系統光瞳面上之照明光之光量分布(2次光源 大小與形狀)’即變更標線片R之照明條件。又,該照明 36 200400540 早兀係在變更該照明條件之際,極力抑制光量損失。 又,位於光束整形照度均勻化光學系統2〇内部之射出 缟側之禝眼透㉟22 ’係為了用均勻之照度分布來照明標線 片R,藉由前述截面形狀被整形之雷射光束之射入,在與 ^明光學系、统12《光曈面大致一至夂配置之該射出側焦點 面,形成由多數個點光源(光源像)所構成之面光源(2 =光 源)。以下,將從該2次光源所射出之雷射光束稱為 光EL」者。 又,在複眼透鏡22之射出側焦點面之附近,也可配置 用大致等角度間隔配置複數個開口光圈(例如,由一般之圓 形開口所構成之開口光圈(一般光圈));也可配置用來縮= 由小的圓形開口所構成之之相干係數(σ )值之開口光圈(小 ^光圈);環帶照明用之環帶狀之開口光圈(環帶光圈)及變 形光源法用,使複數個開口偏心配置所構成之變形開口光 圈等圓板狀構件所構成之照明系統開口光圈。這種情形, 係與前述之光學單元同時使用該照明系統開口光圈板,在 照明光EL之光程上,能選擇性地設定任一個開口光圈, 藉此,能進行照明光學系統之光瞳面上之照明光之光量分 布(2次光源之大小與形狀),即能進行標線片R之照明條 件之變更。特別係即使是只用前述之光學單元不能設定之 照明條件’也能設置照明系統開口光圈,能減少光量損失 ’且能簡單設定該照明條件。 在從複眼透鏡22(或照明系統開口光圈板)所射出之照 明光EL之光程上,配置了中繼光學系統(由第1中繼透鏡 37 200400540 28A 及第 2 、’、透見28B所構成,該中繼透鏡係介於固定 才示線片遮簾30A盥可動锣給μ产被 /、Γ動軚線片遮簾30Β之間)。固定標線 遮簾30Α係從共軛面對標線片r之圖案面,稍散焦地配 $成規疋標線片R上之矩形照明領域Mr之矩形開口 在忒固疋標線片遮簾3〇A之附近,對應掃描方向(γ 車由方向,即H 1+ 一 圖中之紙面内左右方向)之方向之位置及寬 -置了 /、有可變開口部之可動標線片遮簾3〇b,在開始 及、°束^^田曝光時’係透過可動標線片遮| 30B,進-步 限制照明領域,藉此來防止不要部份之曝光。X,可動標 線片遮簾3GB關於對應與掃描方向正交之非掃描方向(X轴 :向:即第i圖中之紙面正交方向)之方向,開口部之寬也 是可變,能根據要轉印在晶圓上之標線片R之圖案,調整 照明領域之非掃描方向之寬。 一在構成中繼光學系統之第2中繼透鏡28B後方之照明 =EL之光私上,配置彎曲反射鏡M(用以將通過該第2中 繼透鏡28Β之照明光Ε1反射向標線片R),在該彎曲反射 鏡Μ後方之照明光el之光程上,配置聚焦透鏡32。 々在以上之構成中,複眼透鏡22之射入面、可動標線片 遮簾30B之配置面、及標線片&之圖案面,係設定成在光 學上共軛,複眼透鏡22之射出側焦點面所形成之光源面( 照明光學系統之光瞳面)、投影光學系統pL之傅立葉轉換 面(射出光瞳面),係設定成光學上共軛地,形成柯拉 (Kohler)照明系統。 若簡單說明這樣所構成之照明系統之作用的話,則從 38 200400540 光源1 6脈衝發光之雷射光束LB射入光束整形照度均勻化 光學系統20,截面形狀被整形等後,再射入到複眼透鏡 22。藉此,在複眼透鏡22之射出側焦點面,形成前述2 次光源。 從上述2次光源射出之照明光EL,經由第丨中繼透鏡 28A ’到達固定標線片遮簾30A,進一步通過該固定標線 片遮簾30A之開口及可動標線片遮簾3〇B、以及第2中繼 透鏡28B,藉由反射鏡μ,使光程在垂直下方彎曲後,經 由聚光透鏡32,用均勻之照度分布來照明標線片台rst 所保持之標線片R上之矩形照明領域IAR。 在别述標線片台RST上,裝載標線片R,透過未圖示 之靜電夾頭(或真空夾頭)等來吸附保持。標線片台rst係 藉由未圖示之驅動系統,在水平面(χγ平面)内,形成能微 小驅動(包含旋轉)之構成。標線片台RST,例如,係藉由 包含線性馬達等未圖示之標線片台驅動部,在與照明系統 之光軸IX(與後述投影光學系統PL之光軸Αχ 一致)垂直 之ΧΥ平面内,能微小驅動(包含ζ軸周圍之旋轉),並且 ,能用指定既定之掃描方向(此處,係指γ軸方向)之掃描 速度來驅動。 標線片台RST之ΧΥ平面内之位置,係透過設置在或 形成在標線片台RST之反射面,藉由標線片雷射干涉計( 以下,稱為「標線片干涉計」)54R,例如,以〇 5〜 程度之解析度隨時檢測。來自標線片干涉計54反之桿線片 台RST之位置資訊,供應至本體室u之外部所設置之主 39 200400540 才工制扁置50。主控制裝置5〇,根據標線片台rst之位置 貝訊,透過標線片台驅動部(未圖示),來驅動控制標線片 台 RST 〇 、。 軚線片R所使用之材質必須因所使用之光源而加 、乂區刀。即,當把KrF準分子雷射、ArF準分子雷射當作 ^此使用合成石英、螢石等氟化物結晶、或摻氟石 央^但當使用F2雷射時,必須用螢石等敦化物結晶、或 摻氟石英等來形成。 /刚述才又影光學系統PL,例如,係使用兩側遠心之縮小 ^5統〆。錢影光學“ PL之投影倍率,例如,係1/4、 〆6等。因此,如前述,若藉由照明光EL·,使標線 之…月領域1AR受到照明的話,則透過投影光學系 PL ’使該照明領域⑽内之標線片r之電路圖案等之 :小像形成在與該照明領域IAR共輛之晶H W上之照明 …EL之照射領域(曝光領域)IA。 就投影光學糸# ΡΤ π ^ y 予糸、、先PL·而吕,係使用折射系統(只由複數 1 1〇 2〇片程度之折射光學元件(透鏡元件)1 3所 中成。在構成該投影光學系统PL之複數片透鏡元件13 面側(標線片卩側)之複數片(為了簡化說明,此處 係5片)之透鏡元件13 、n 、w _ 性能修正斤制写4S 1 2 133、丨35、係藉由成像 元件n〜 8’從外部形成可.驅動之可動透鏡。透鏡 保持在別透過未圖示之雙重構造之透鏡保持器, ,、it此内1 〜135係分別保持在内側透鏡支持器 二内側透鏡保持器係藉由未圖示之驅動元件,例如, 200400540 壓電凡件等,對外側透鏡保持器,用3點支撐在重力方向 。並且’對這些驅動元件獨立調整施加電壓,藉此形成使 各透鏡70件l3l〜13S能在ζ軸方向(投影光學系統PL之光 軸方向)及對χγ面之傾斜方向(即,χ軸周圍之旋轉方向( 0 X)及Υ轴周圍之旋轉方向(6) y))驅動(能傾斜)之構成。 其他之透鏡7L件13係透過通常之透鏡保持器,保持在 鏡筒。又,不限於透鏡元件13!〜135,也可構成能驅動像 差修正板(光學板,係修正配置在投影光學系統pL之光瞳Can improve its productivity. Therefore, from another point of view, the present invention is a device manufacturing method using any one of the first to fourth exposure devices of the present invention, or a device manufacturing using any one of the first to fifth exposure methods of the present invention. method. [Embodiment] Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12. Fig. 1 shows an outline of an exposure apparatus according to an embodiment. 34 200400540 Kouhai exposure equipment 1GG series, exposure light source (hereinafter, referred to as "light source") + 'step scanning using a pulsed laser light source Method of reducing the projection exposure device (so-called scanner). The exposure device 100 is provided with: an illumination system (which is composed of a light source 16 and an illumination optical system 12), a reticle stage RST (which is used as a hood stage 'retains a reticle 纟 R that serves as a hood, By the energy from this lighting system: the exposure of the beam is illuminated by the illumination light EL), the projection optical system pL (which is the exposure illumination light el emitted from the reticle R is projected on the object as the object Circle (image plane)), wafer stage WST (holding the crystal mesh w), and these control systems. For the aforementioned light source 16, a KrF excimer laser (with an output wavelength of 248 nm) is used here. Also, copybook, shield! & Second, t, especially the original 16 and Lv, can also use the pulsed UV light source in the vacuum ultraviolet field such as output F2 laser (output wavelength 157nm) or ArF 帛 molecular laser (output wavelength 193nm). The above-mentioned light source 16 is actually provided with a room u for housing the exposure device (consisting of the constituent elements of the illumination optical system 12 and the reticle stage RST, the projection optical system pL, and the wafer stage WS). In a service room with a low degree of cleanliness that is separate from the installed clean room, the optical system for adjusting the optical axis called the beam matching unit is connected to the room η through at least a part including an optical system for transmitting light (not shown). . The light source 16 controls the on / off of the laser beam LB output and the i pulse of the laser beam LB according to the control information TS from the main control device 50. Frequency), center wavelength and spectrum half-value width (wavelength width). Describe the illumination optical system i 2 'with ·· beam shaping and uniform illumination 35 200400540 academic system 20 (including cylindrical lens, beam amplifier (ν σσ ^ not shown), and optical product benefit (homogenizer) 22, etc.) , Illumination system aperture diaphragm 24, ^ th relay lens 28A, 2nd relay lens 28B, fixed reticle curtain tender, movable reticle curtain 30B, optical path bending mirror M and condenser lens M Special. As the optical integrator, a fly-eye lens, a rod-type integrator (inner-surface reflection-type integrator), or a diffractive optical element can be used. For the sake of practicality, hereafter also referred to as the sorrowful system uses a compound eye lens as the optical integrator 22, the eye lens 22. The aforementioned beam shaping / illumination uniformity optical system 20 is provided through a light transmission window 17 in the room 11 and is connected to an optical system for light transmission (not shown). The beam shaping / illuminance uniformizing optical system 20 shapes, for example, a cross-sectional shape of a laser beam LB that is transmitted through a window 17 by a light source 16 that emits pulse light through a pulse using a cylindrical lens or a beam amplifier. Furthermore, in this beam shaping / illuminance uniformity optical system 20, the laser beam is passed through a coarse energy adjuster (not shown, equipped with an ND filter), and the transmittance can be changed in multiple stages or continuously in a proportional series. ), A plurality of diffractive optical elements in interchangeable configuration, movable cymbals (cone, polyhedron, etc.) along the optical axis of the illumination optical system, and an optical unit (not shown, which includes a zoom optical system) (At least one of them), reach the learner integrator 22 first. When the optical integrator 22 is a fly-eye lens, the optical unit can change the intensity distribution of the illumination light on the incident surface. When the optical integrator 22 is an internal reflection integrator, the illumination light can be changed on the incident surface. By changing the incident angle and the wide range, the light quantity distribution (secondary light source size and shape) of the illumination light on the pupil surface of the illumination optical system is changed, that is, the illumination condition of the reticle R is changed. In addition, the lighting 36 200400540 has tried to suppress the loss of light when changing the lighting conditions. In addition, the eye-opening 22 'located on the exit side of the beam shaping illuminance uniformity optical system 20 is used to illuminate the reticle R with a uniform illuminance distribution. The surface light source (2 = light source) composed of a plurality of point light sources (light source images) is formed on the exit-side focal plane that is arranged approximately one to one with the optical plane and the optical system. Hereinafter, the laser beam emitted from the secondary light source is referred to as a light EL ". In addition, a plurality of aperture apertures (for example, aperture apertures (general apertures) formed by general circular apertures) may be disposed near the focal plane on the exit side of the fly-eye lens 22 at approximately equal angular intervals; Aperture (small iris) used to reduce = coherence coefficient (σ) value formed by small circular openings; annular aperture diaphragms (annular diaphragm apertures) for annular lighting and deformed light source method , The illumination system opening aperture formed by a circular plate-shaped member such as a deformed opening aperture formed by eccentrically disposing a plurality of openings. In this case, the opening aperture plate of the illumination system is used at the same time as the aforementioned optical unit, and any opening aperture can be selectively set on the optical path of the illumination light EL, whereby the pupil surface of the illumination optical system can be performed. The light quantity distribution of the above illumination light (the size and shape of the secondary light source) can change the lighting conditions of the reticle R. In particular, even in the lighting condition which cannot be set using only the aforementioned optical unit, the opening aperture of the lighting system can be set, the amount of light loss can be reduced, and the lighting condition can be simply set. On the optical path of the illuminating light EL emitted from the fly-eye lens 22 (or the aperture diaphragm of the lighting system), a relay optical system (the first relay lens 37 200400540 28A and the second, ', and see 28B) Composition, the relay lens is between the fixed line sheet curtain 30A and the movable gong to the μ production quilt /, and the movable line sheet curtain 30B). The fixed graticule curtain 30A is a pattern surface from the conjugate surface to the graticule r, which is slightly defocused. The rectangular opening of the rectangular lighting area Mr on the regular graticule R is opened in the solid solid graticule curtain. Near 30A, the position corresponding to the scanning direction (γ car direction, H 1+ in the left and right direction on the paper in the picture) and the width-positioned / movable graticule with variable openings Curtain 30b, at the beginning and at the beginning of the beam exposure, is covered by a movable reticle | 30B, which further restricts the lighting area to prevent unnecessary exposure. X, the movable graticule curtain 3GB corresponds to the non-scanning direction orthogonal to the scanning direction (X axis: direction: the direction orthogonal to the paper surface in the i-th figure). The width of the opening is also variable. To transfer the pattern of the reticle R on the wafer, adjust the width in the non-scanning direction of the illumination area. -On the light private of the illumination = EL behind the second relay lens 28B constituting the relay optical system, a curved reflector M (for reflecting the illumination light E1 passing through the second relay lens 28B toward the reticle) R) A focusing lens 32 is arranged on the optical path of the illumination light el behind the curved mirror M. 々In the above configuration, the entrance surface of the fly-eye lens 22, the arrangement surface of the movable reticle curtain 30B, and the pattern surface of the reticle & are set to be optically conjugate, and the exit of the fly-eye lens 22 The light source surface (the pupil surface of the illumination optical system) formed by the side focus surface, and the Fourier transform surface (the exit pupil surface) of the projection optical system pL are set to be optically conjugated to form a Kohler illumination system . If the function of the lighting system constituted in this way is briefly explained, the laser beam LB emitted from 16 200400540 light source 16 pulses enters the beam-shaping uniformity optical system 20, the cross-sectional shape is shaped, etc., and then it is injected into the compound eye Lens 22 As a result, the aforementioned secondary light source is formed on the exit-side focal plane of the fly-eye lens 22. The illumination light EL emitted from the above secondary light source reaches the fixed reticle curtain 30A through the first relay lens 28A ′, and further passes through the opening of the fixed reticle curtain 30A and the movable reticle curtain 30B. And the second relay lens 28B, the optical path is bent vertically downward by the mirror μ, and then the condenser lens 32 is used to illuminate the reticle R held by the reticle stage rst with a uniform illuminance distribution. Rectangular lighting area IAR. A reticle R is mounted on the reticle stage RST, and is sucked and held by an electrostatic chuck (or vacuum chuck) or the like (not shown). The reticle stage rst is formed by a drive system (not shown) in a horizontal plane (χγ plane) that can be driven minutely (including rotation). The reticle stage RST is, for example, a reticle stage driving unit including a linear motor, which is not shown, and is perpendicular to the optical axis IX of the illumination system (which coincides with the optical axis Aχ of the projection optical system PL described later). In the plane, it can be driven minutely (including rotation around the z axis), and it can be driven at a scanning speed that specifies a predetermined scanning direction (here, the γ axis direction). The position in the XY plane of the reticle stage RST is set or formed on the reflective surface of the reticle stage RST by means of a reticle laser interferometer (hereinafter, referred to as a "reticle interferometer") 54R, for example, can be detected at any time with a resolution of about 0.05 to about. The position information from the reticle interferometer 54 on the other hand and the reticle stage RST is supplied to the main unit 40 200400540 which is set outside the body chamber u and is flat 50. The main control device 50 drives and controls the reticle stage RST 0 through the reticle stage driving unit (not shown) according to the position of the reticle stage rst. The material used for the grommet R must be added to the light source used. That is, when KrF excimer laser and ArF excimer laser are used as ^ this uses synthetic crystals such as synthetic quartz, fluorite, or fluorite-doped ^ but when using F2 laser, it must be fluorite, etc. It can be formed by crystallizing or fluorinated quartz. / The optical system PL has just been described, for example, using a telecentric reduction on both sides ^ 5 system. Qian Ying Optics' PL projection magnification is, for example, 1/4, 〆6, etc. Therefore, as described above, if the illumination area EL · is used to illuminate the moon area 1AR of the marking line, it will pass through the projection optical system. PL 'makes the circuit pattern of the reticle r in this lighting field: the small image formed on the crystal HW shared with the lighting field IAR ... the illumination field (exposure field) IA of EL. As for projection optics糸 # ΡΤ π ^ y 糸 、, PLPL · Er Lu, using a refractive system (only composed of a number of refractive optical elements (lens elements) 1 of the number of 1 1020 pieces. In the composition of the projection optics Multiple lens elements 13 of the system PL 13 lens elements 13 on the surface side (the reticle side) are for the sake of simplicity. Here are 5 lens elements 13, n, w _ performance correction. 4S 1 2 133,丨 35. The movable lens that can be driven from the outside is formed by the imaging elements n ~ 8 '. The lens is held in a lens holder that does not pass through a double structure (not shown), and 1 ~ 135 are held at Inner lens holder Two inner lens holders are driven by a drive element (not shown) For example, 200400540 piezoelectric elements, etc., support the outer lens holder with 3 points in the direction of gravity. And 'the driving voltage is independently adjusted for these driving elements, thereby forming 70 lenses 131 ~ 13S of each lens can be on the z axis Direction (the optical axis direction of the projection optical system PL) and the tilt direction of the χγ plane (that is, the rotation direction (0 X) around the χ axis and the rotation direction (6) y) around the Υ axis) The other lens 7L 13 is held by the ordinary lens holder and held in the lens barrel. It is not limited to the lens elements 13! To 135, and it can also be configured to drive an aberration correction plate (optical plate, which is arranged to correct the projection) Pupil of optical system pL
面附近或像面側之透鏡、或投影光學系統pL之像差、特 別係忒非旋轉對稱成份)等。並且,可驅動這些光學元件之 自由度(可移動之方向)不限於3個,也可1個、2個 個以上。 —味 杈衫光學系統PL之光瞳面附近,設置了在胡 二耗1内能連續變更數值孔徑(NA)之光瞳開σ光圈15。就 Λ光目里開σ光圈15而言’例如,係使用所謂的彩虹光圈 。該光瞳開口光圈15係藉由主控制裝置50來控制。A lens near the surface or on the image surface side, or aberration of the projection optical system pL, especially a non-rotationally symmetric component). Moreover, the degree of freedom (movable direction) that can drive these optical elements is not limited to three, but may be one, two or more. —Taste A pupil opening σ aperture 15 capable of continuously changing the numerical aperture (NA) in the vicinity of the pupil plane of the PL optical system PL is provided. In the case of opening σ aperture 15 in Λ light, for example, a so-called rainbow aperture is used. The pupil aperture stop 15 is controlled by a main control device 50.
作為ί明:使肖KrF準分子雷射光、ArF準分子雷射光來 EL日夺’也能使用榮石等氟化物結晶或前述摻 夬之其他合成石英來作為構成投影光學系統杜 =元件,當使用^雷射光時,該投影光學系統PL所使 石:透鏡之材質係全部使用螢石等氟化物結晶或前述摻敗 :圓W係、透過未圖示之晶圓保持器,藉由靜電吸附( 次真工吸附)等’保持在前述晶圓台WST上。 41 200400540 晶圓台WST,係配置在投影光學系統PL之下方,藉 由未圖不之晶圓台驅動部(其係由線性馬達、音圈馬達 (VCM)等所構成),能在χγ平面内方向及z轴方3向驅動, 對ΧΥ面之傾斜方向(其係X軸周圍之旋轉方向及ΥAs ί Ming: To make Xiao KrF excimer laser light and ArF excimer laser light to EL, you can also use fluoride crystals such as Rongshi or other synthetic quartz doped with ytterbium to form a projection optical system. When using laser light, the material used in the projection optical system PL: the lens is made entirely of fluoride crystals such as fluorite or the aforementioned dopant: round W, through a wafer holder (not shown), and electrostatic adsorption (Second real adsorption) and the like are held on the aforementioned wafer stage WST. 41 200400540 The wafer stage WST is arranged below the projection optical system PL. The wafer stage driving unit (which is composed of a linear motor, a voice coil motor (VCM), etc.) can be located on the χγ plane. Inward direction and z-axis direction drive in 3 directions, the tilt direction to the X and Y planes (which is the direction of rotation around the X axis and Y
軸周圍之旋轉方向(0y))也能稍微驅動。,晶^台WST 不僅能移動掃描方向(Y軸方向),而且能使晶圓w上之複 數個照射領域對各曝光領域IA相對移動,來進行曝光, 構j也能在與掃描方向正交之非掃描方向(x軸方向)移動 ,藉此能重複使晶圓W上之各照射領域進行掃描曝光之動 作、與移動到用來下一照射曝光之加速開始位置之動作之 步進掃描動作。 晶圓台WST之XY平面内之位置(包含z軸周圍之旋 轉(0 Z)旋轉),係透過設置或形成在晶圓台WST之反射面 ,藉由晶圓雷射干涉計(以下,簡稱為「晶圓干涉計」 )54W ’例如’以〇.5〜lnm程度之解析度來進行隨時檢測 。晶圓干涉計54W,包含複數個多軸干涉計(具有複數個測 長軸),藉由這些干涉計,能量測晶圓台WST之旋轉(Θ z 方疋轉(yawing)、Θ y旋轉(pitching)(Y軸周圍之旋轉)、及θ x旋轉(rolling)(X軸周圍之旋轉)。 藉由晶圓干涉計54W所檢測之晶圓台WST之位置資 訊(或速度資訊),供應至主控制裝置5〇。主控制裝置5〇 根據晶圓台WST之上述位置資訊(或速度資訊),透過未圖 示之晶圓台驅動部,來控制晶圓台WST之位置。 又,在晶圓台WST上,形成後述之調準系統ALG之 42 200400540 基線量測用基& ^ +屺唬寺之基準記號所形成之基準記號相 Μ,其表面係被固定成大致與晶圓W之表面同高。 又’晶圓台W91T + n 之+γ側(第1圖之紙面内右側)之御 面係女裝作為裝垂ρ ό 4 自士之榀π式光學特性量測裝置之波面 像差S測裝置80。 該波面像差量測裝置80,如第2圖所示,具備中空框 體82、党光光學系# ^ 糸、,先84(由稷數個光學元件所構成,該光 干7C件係以既疋之關係位置,配置在該框冑μ之内部)、The rotation direction (0y)) around the shaft can also be driven slightly. The wafer WST can not only move the scanning direction (Y-axis direction), but also can make multiple exposure areas on the wafer w relatively move each exposure area IA for exposure, and the structure j can also be orthogonal to the scanning direction. Moving in the non-scanning direction (x-axis direction), thereby repeating the scanning exposure operation of each irradiation area on the wafer W, and the step scanning operation of moving to the acceleration start position for the next irradiation exposure . The positions in the XY plane of the wafer stage WST (including the rotation around the z-axis (0 Z) rotation) are set or formed on the reflecting surface of the wafer stage WST by a wafer laser interferometer (hereinafter, referred to as "Wafer interferometer") 54W "For example," the detection is performed at any time with a resolution of about 0.5 to 1 nm. The wafer interferometer 54W includes a plurality of multi-axis interferometers (with a plurality of length measuring axes). With these interferometers, the rotation of the wafer table WST (Θ z square yawing, Θ y rotation) can be measured by energy. (Pitching) (rotation around the Y axis), and θ x rotation (rotation around the X axis). Position information (or speed information) of the wafer table WST detected by the wafer interferometer 54W is supplied. To the main control device 50. The main control device 50 controls the position of the wafer stage WST through a wafer stage driving unit (not shown) based on the above-mentioned position information (or speed information) of the wafer stage WST. On the wafer stage WST, the alignment system ALG 42 which will be described later is formed. 200400540 Baseline measurement base & ^ + 屺 屺 寺 reference mark formed by the reference mark phase M, the surface of which is fixed approximately to the wafer W The surface is the same height. The 'Wait table W91T + n + + side (right side of the paper surface in Figure 1) of the royal face is a woman's dress. Wavefront aberration S measuring device 80. This wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is hollow as shown in FIG. 82, # party light optical system 84 first ^ ,, Mi (switchgrass is constituted by a plurality of optical elements, the light-based dry 7C member position relationship of both piece goods, arranged in the interior of the housing of the helmet μ),
以及受光部86(配置在框體82内部之一X側端部)。And a light receiving unit 86 (arranged at one X-side end portion inside the housing 82).
前述框體82係由構件(用χζ截面L字狀,在内部形 成空間)所構成,在其最上部㈤方向端部),形成俯視(從 上方看)圓形開口 82a,以使來自框體82上方之光向框體 82之内部空間射入。又,為了從框體82之内部側被覆該 開口 82a ’没置了玻璃蓋88。在玻璃蓋88之上面,藉由絡 等金屬之蒸錢’在中央部形成具有圓形開口之遮光膜,藉 由該遮光膜’在量測投影光學系统pL之波面像差之際, 遮蔽來自周圍所不f要之光射人到受光光學系統料。 别述文光光學系統84,係由在框體82内部之玻璃蓋 之下方從上往下依序配置之物鏡84a、中繼透鏡84b 、’考曲反射鏡84c、準直透鏡84d(其係依序配置在該彎曲 反射鏡84c之一 X側)、及微透鏡陣列8补所構成。彎曲反 射鏡84c係以45。斜度設定,藉由該彎曲反射鏡84c,從 上方垂直向下對物鏡84a射入光之光程係向準直透鏡8牝 彎曲。又,構成該受光用光學系統84之各光學構件係在 43 200400540 框體82 f之内側’透過未圖示之保持構件,分別加以固 定。前述Μ鏡P㈣84e之複數個小凸透鏡(透鏡元件)係 在對光程正交之面内,陣列狀配置來構成。 前述受光部,係由受光元件(由2維CCD等所構成)與 電荷傳送控制電路等電氣電路所構成。受光元件射入到物 鏡84a,因接收從微透鏡陣列84e所射出之所有光束,故 具有充分之面積。X,受光部86之量測資料係透過未圖 示之信號線,或用無線發射,往主控制裝置5〇輸出。The frame 82 is composed of a member (with a ζ-shaped cross-section in the shape of an L, forming a space inside), and at the uppermost end in the ㈤ direction, a circular opening 82a is formed in plan view (viewed from above) so that the frame 82 The light above 82 enters the internal space of the frame 82. A glass cover 88 is not provided to cover the opening 82a 'from the inner side of the housing 82. On the glass cover 88, a light-shielding film with a circular opening is formed in the center by steaming metal such as metal, and the light-shielding film is used to measure the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system pL. The surrounding unintended light hits the receiving optical system material. The light-optical optical system 84 is an objective lens 84a, a relay lens 84b, a 'cold mirror 84c, and a collimator lens 84d (which are sequentially arranged from top to bottom below the glass cover inside the housing 82). It is sequentially arranged on the X side of one of the curved mirrors 84 c) and a micro lens array 8 complement. The curved mirror 84c is 45 °. The inclination is set so that the optical path of the light incident on the objective lens 84a vertically downward from the curved mirror 84c is bent toward the collimator lens 8 牝 from above. In addition, each optical member constituting the light receiving optical system 84 is fixed on the inside of the frame 82f of 43 200400540 'through a holding member (not shown) and fixed. The plurality of small convex lenses (lens elements) of the aforementioned M mirror P 镜 84e are arranged in an array shape on a plane orthogonal to the optical path. The light-receiving unit is composed of a light-receiving element (consisting of a two-dimensional CCD or the like) and an electric circuit such as a charge transfer control circuit. The light receiving element enters the objective lens 84a and receives all light beams emitted from the microlens array 84e, so that it has a sufficient area. X. The measurement data of the light receiving unit 86 is transmitted to the main control device 50 through a signal line (not shown) or wireless transmission.
使用上述之波面像差量測裝置8〇,藉此能用本體(即 ’投影光學系、统PL組裝在曝光裝置之狀態)來進行投影光 學系統PL之波面像差之量測。又,針對使用該波面像差 量測裝置80之投影光學系統PL之波面像差之量測方法加 以後述。By using the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 described above, the measurement of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL can be performed using the body (that is, the state where the projection optical system and the system PL are assembled in the exposure device). A method of measuring the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL using the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 will be described later.
第1圖中,在本實施形態之曝光裝置1〇〇中,設置有 射入方式之多焦點位置檢測系統(以下簡稱為「焦點檢測系 統」)。該焦點檢測系統係由照射系統60a(具有藉由主控制 裝置50來控制開/關之光源,向投影光學系統之成像面 ’對光軸AX,從斜方向照射用來形成多數個針孔或縫隙 像之成像光束)、與受光系統60b(接收這些成像光束之晶 圓^表面之反射光束)。又,與本實施形態之焦點位置檢 測系統(60a、60b)同樣之多點焦點位置檢测系統之詳細構 成,例如,已揭示在日本特開平6_2834〇3號公報及對應該 公報之美國專利第5,448,332號等,本案引用上述公報及 美國專利之揭示,作為本說明書記載之一部份。 44 200400540 又上述公報及美國專利所記载之多點隹 &姑,尤处认, 私 < 夕點焦點位置檢測 糸統,不僅檢測晶圓w之位置 罝貝σί1 (其係在曝光領域IA内 至y在離非掃描方向所設定之 與备絡p 稷數點,有關分別與投影光 Γ X平行方向(z軸方向)),而且具有先讀 取#彳田方向之晶圓w之起 、 能也可以,又,被昭射“二 但即使不具有這些功 平行四邊形或其他形狀。 〜射之先束之形狀也可是 主控制裝置50,係在掃描曝光時等,來自受光系統 60b之焦點偏移信號(散声 二 ,(1、、、^虎),例如,根據S曲線信號 二:i:成物 :動:(未圖示),來控制對晶圓…位置及χγ面之斜 度,藉此來執行自動聚焦及 卜 筏力怂、十、今、士 勒十旱又’主控制裝置50 係在後述之波面像差之量測之 (60a、_),來進行θ 用焦點位置檢測糸統 …Η 量測裝置…位置之量測 之斜度量測。 了進仃波面像差量測裝置80 =曝光裝置⑽係備有偏轴方式之調準系統咖。 以離軸(off·叫方^鮮“ alg, WST上所保持之晶圓w 日日w 口 板FM上之基準記號之位 +己威 罝里,則寺。就該調準系統ALG而 :’例如,係將使晶圓上之光阻不感光之寬波帶之檢測光 束照射對象記號,藉此來自該 ^ ^ ^ 丁象5己唬之反射光,使用攝 衫(等)來攝影成像於受光面之對象記號之像愈未 圖示之指標像’使用輸出這些攝影信號之影像處理二式 45 200400540 FIA(Field Image Alignment)系統之感測器。又,不限於 FIA系統,當然也能單獨或用適當組合來使用調準感夠哭 ,其係將相干(coherence)之檢測光照射對象記號,檢測從 該對象記號所產生之散射光或繞射光,干涉檢出從該對象 記號所產生之2個繞射光(例如,同階數)。 又,本實施形態之曝光裝置100,雖省略圖示,位在 標線片R之上方,設有一對標線片調準檢測系統,其係由 TTR(Thr〇Ugh The Reticle)調準系統所構成,該TTR調準系 統係使用曝光波長(透過投影光學系統PL,用來同時觀察 標線片R上之標線片記號與對應之基準記號板上之基準記 號),就這些標線片調準檢測系統而言,例如,係使^與: 本特開+ 7-176468號公報及對應該公報之^國專^第 5,646,413號等所揭示者同樣之構成者。在申請者所指定之 指定國家或所選擇之選擇國家之國内法令允許範圍内',本 案引用上述公報及美國專利之“,當作本說 一部份。 ㈢心秋之 第丄圖中,前述控制系統主要係由前述主_裝置Μ 所構成。主控制裝置5〇係由工作 ,站(或稱為微電腦,盆俜 由咖、職、編等所構成)等所構成,除了進行㈣ 之各種控制動作之外,也控制整個 、 例如,W 個波置。主控制裝置50, 為了確貫進行曝光動作’例如, WST之照射間步進、曝光時序等。 拴制了晶圓台 又,主控制裝置50,例如’係連 由硬碟所構成)、輸入裝置L、衣置42(其係 。、係由鍵盤、滑氣等指向元 46 200400540 :?所構成)及CRT顯示器(或液晶顯示器)等之顯示裝置 主拴制扁置50係通過LAN等通訊網路,連接工 作:與個人電腦等模擬用電腦46。在該模擬用電腦46中 ^ 7 Ί ’置1 GG之光學模型所設定之成像模擬軟體( 即’成像模擬器)。 =次’針對維護時等所進行之曝光裝£丨⑼之波面像 十、之罝測方法加以說明。又,在以下之說明中,為了簡化 波面像差量測裝置8G内之受光光學系統84之像差 係當作小到能加以忽視者。 在通常之曝光時,波面像差量測裝置80係從晶圓台 拆下,在量測波面之際’首先,係藉由作 工程師㈣下’稱為「㈣者等」),對晶圓台WST之: :罢:订安裝波面像差量測裝置8…業。當安裝波面 里測裝置80之際,在量測波面時’波面像差量測事 ^ 80為了涵蓋在晶圓台術之移動行程内,係透過螺检 或磁鐵等’固定在既定之基準面(此處係指+丫側之面卜 上述之安裝完成後,藉由作業者等,來應答開始量測 :命令之輸入,主控制裝置50,其波面像差量測裝置8〇 :了疋位在調準系、统ALG之下方’係透過晶圓台驅 未圖示),使晶圓台WST移動。並且,主控制裝置5〇藉由 调準系統ALG來檢測設置於波面像差量測裝置8〇之未圖 示之對位記號,根據該檢測結果與此時之晶圓干涉計Μ: ,量測值’算出對位記號之位置座標,求出波面像差量測 裝置80之正確位置。並且’在量測波面像差量測裝置⑽ 47 200400540 之位置後’主控制裝置5 0係如以下所述,執行波面像差 ’ 之量測。 首先,主控制裝置50係藉由未圖示之標線片承載器, 將針孔圖案所形成之未圖示之量測用標線片(以下,稱為「 針孔標線片」)承載在標線片台RST上。該針孔標線片係 在该圖案面之複數點形成針孔(大致成為理想點光源,產生 球面波之針孔)之標線片。又,例如,中心為了與投影光學 系統PL之光軸Αχ 一致,當設定針孔標線片時,複數個 針孔係配置在照明領域IAR内,且該投影像係分別形成在 籲 投影光學系統PL之視野内,量測波面像差之複數點(後述 之第1〜第η量測點)。 又,在此處所使用之針孔標線片中,係在上面設置擴 散面等,在投影光學系統PL之光瞳面之大致全面,使來 自針孔圖案之光分布,藉此在投影光學系統PL之光瞳面 之全面,來量測波面像差者。又,本實施形態中,因在投 景> 光學系統PL之光瞳面附近設置開口光圈1 5,故實質上 係在開口光圈15所規定之該光瞳面量測波面像差。 _ 承載針孔標線片後,主控制裝置5〇使用前述標線片調 準檢測系統,來檢測形成於針孔標線片之標線片調準記號 ’根據該檢測結果,使針孔標線片調準既定之位置。藉此 ’針孔標線片之中心即與投影光學系統PL之光軸大致一 致。 然後,主控制裝置50將控制資訊TS供應至光源1 6 , 使雷射光束LB發光。藉此,來自照明光學系統丨2之照明 48 200400540 光el照射在針孔標線片。並且,從針孔標線片之複數個 針孔射出之光透過投影光學系統PL,聚光在像面上,針孔 像成像在像面上。 其次’主控制裝置50在針孔標線片上之任一針孔(以 下’稱為所著眼針孔)像成像之成像點,為了與波面像差量 測裝置80之開口 82a之大致中心一致’一面監控晶圓干涉 計54W之量測值,一面透過晶圓台驅動部(未圖示),來移 動晶圓台WST。此時,主控制裳置5〇根據焦點位置檢測 系統(60a、60b)之檢測結果,在針孔像成像之像面,使波 面像差量測裝置80之玻璃蓋88之上面—致,透過晶圓L 驅動部(未圖示),將晶圓台術向2軸方向稍微驅動。此 時,亦視需要進行調整晶圓台WST之傾斜角。藉此,所 著眼針孔之像光束係透過玻璃蓋88之φ血„ ^ I 6之中央開口,射入到 觉光光學糸統8 4,藉由構成受弁邱 ^ 僻取又九。卩之86之受光元件來接 收光。 詳言之,係從針孔標線片上之所著眼針孔產生球面波 ,該球面波係透過投影光學系統PL、物鏡⑷(構成波面像 差量測裝置80之受光用光學系 予示統84)、中繼透鏡84b、反 射鏡84c、準直透鏡84d而成 风马千订先束,照射於微透鏡 陣列84e。藉此,投影光學 凡之先目里面中繼在微透鏡 陣列84e,並被分割。而且 、一 而且错由該微透鏡陣列84e之各 透鏡元件,各別之光被聚光在杜 ^ 甘又尤兀件之受光面,分別在 該受光面成像出針孔像。In FIG. 1, an exposure device 100 of this embodiment is provided with a multi-focus position detection system (hereinafter referred to simply as a "focus detection system") of an injection method. The focus detection system is composed of an illumination system 60a (having a light source controlled by the main control device 50 to be turned on / off, and irradiated from an oblique direction to the optical axis AX toward the imaging surface of the projection optical system to form a plurality of pinholes or The imaging beam of the slot image), and the light receiving system 60b (the reflected beam on the surface of the wafer receiving these imaging beams). In addition, the detailed configuration of a multi-point focus position detection system similar to the focus position detection system (60a, 60b) of this embodiment is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6_2834403 and corresponding US Patent No. No. 5,448,332, etc., the present disclosure cited the disclosures of the above-mentioned bulletin and the US patent as part of the description of this specification. 44 200400540 In addition, many points described in the above-mentioned publication and U.S. patents are particularly recognized as private point focus position detection systems, which not only detect the position of the wafer w1 (which is in the field of exposure) The number of points in the IA and y in the non-scanning direction is set to the number of points p and the number of parallel lines, which are respectively parallel to the projection light Γ X (z-axis direction), and has the ability to first read the wafer w in # 彳 田 direction. It can be, and can be, also, it is "2" but even if it does not have these functions parallelogram or other shapes. ~ The shape of the beam before the shot can also be the main control device 50, which is from the light receiving system 60b during scanning exposure, etc. The focus shift signal (Scatter II, (1 ,,, ^ Tiger)), for example, according to the S-curve signal II: i: product: move: (not shown), to control the position of the wafer ... and the χγ plane The main control device 50 is used to perform the auto-focusing and the rafting force. The main control device 50 measures (60a, _) of the wavefront aberration described below to perform θ Focus position detection system ... Η Measuring device ... Slope measurement of position measurement. Wavefront aberration measurement device 80 = exposure device is equipped with an off-axis alignment system. With off-axis (off · call square ^ fresh "alg, the wafer held on the WST w day day w mouth The position of the reference mark on the board FM + Jiwei Baoli, then Temple. Regarding the alignment system ALG and: 'for example, the detection mark of a wide band that will make the photoresist on the wafer insensitive to the light band, Taking the reflected light from the ^ ^ ^ Ding 5 as a result, use a shirt (and so on) to photograph the image of the object mark imaged on the light-receiving surface. The more unillustrated index image 'Use image processing to output these photographic signals. Equation 45 200400540 A sensor of the FIA (Field Image Alignment) system. It is not limited to the FIA system. Of course, it is possible to use the alignment sense alone or in an appropriate combination to cry. It is a method of irradiating a coherence detection light on an object. The symbol detects the scattered light or the diffracted light generated from the target symbol, and interferes and detects two diffracted lights (for example, the same order number) generated from the target symbol. The exposure device 100 of this embodiment is omitted, though The figure is located above the reticle R. A pair of reticle alignment detection system, which consists of a TTR (Through Ugh The Reticle) alignment system, which uses the exposure wavelength (through the projection optical system PL to observe the reticle at the same time) The reticle mark on R and the corresponding reference mark on the reference mark plate), for these reticle alignment detection systems, for example, ^ and: JP + 7-176468 and corresponding Gazette No. 5,646,413 and other similar constituents. To the extent permitted by the domestic laws of the designated country or selected country designated by the applicant ', this case cited the above-mentioned bulletin and the US Patent " As part of this book. ㈢ 心 秋 之 In the second picture, the aforementioned control system is mainly composed of the aforementioned master device M. The main control device 50 is composed of work, station (also called microcomputer, and pots are composed of coffee, job, editor, etc.), etc. In addition to performing various control actions of ㈣, it also controls the entire, for example, W Wave home. The main control device 50 performs the exposure operation in a consistent manner, for example, the step between irradiations of the WST, the exposure timing, and the like. The wafer stage is locked, and the main control device 50, for example, 'the connection is composed of hard disks', the input device L, the clothing 42 (the system., The system is directed by the keyboard, the air, etc.) 46 200400540: Composition) and display devices such as CRT monitors (or liquid crystal displays). The flat control unit 50 is connected via a communication network such as a LAN to work with a simulation computer 46 such as a personal computer. In the simulation computer 46, the imaging simulation software (i.e., the 'imaging simulator') set with the optical model of 1 GG is set to ^ 7. = Times' Explains the wavefront image of the exposure equipment during maintenance and so on. In the following description, in order to simplify the aberration of the light-receiving optical system 84 in the wavefront aberration measuring device 8G, it is considered to be small enough to be ignored. During normal exposure, the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is removed from the wafer table. When measuring the wavefront, "first, it is called" by the engineer ", etc.), the wafer is measured. Taiwan WST :: Stop: Order to install wavefront aberration measuring device 8 ... industry. When the wave surface in-line measuring device 80 is installed, when measuring the wave surface, the wave surface aberration measurement event ^ 80 is fixed to the predetermined reference surface through screw inspection or magnets to cover the movement stroke of the wafer table operation. (This refers to the + side surface. After the above installation is completed, the operator will respond to start the measurement: the input of the command, the main control device 50, and its wavefront aberration measurement device 8: Located below the alignment system and system ALG 'is to move the wafer table WST through the wafer table drive (not shown). In addition, the main control device 50 detects an alignment mark (not shown) provided in the wavefront aberration measurement device 80 through the alignment system ALG, and the amount of the wafer interferometer M: at this time is measured based on the detection result. The measured value 'calculates the position coordinates of the alignment marks, and obtains the correct position of the wavefront aberration measurement device 80. And "after measuring the position of the wavefront aberration measuring device ⑽ 47 200400540", the main control device 50 performs the wavefront aberration measurement as described below. First, the main control device 50 carries a non-illustrated measurement marking sheet (hereinafter, referred to as a "pinhole marking sheet") formed by a pinhole pattern through a not-shown marking sheet carrier. On the reticle stage RST. The pinhole reticle is a reticle that forms pinholes at a plurality of points on the pattern surface (roughly becoming an ideal point light source and generating pinholes of spherical waves). In addition, for example, in order to coincide with the optical axis Ax of the projection optical system PL, when setting the pinhole reticle, a plurality of pinholes are arranged in the lighting field IAR, and the projection images are formed in the projection optical system respectively. In the field of view of the PL, a plurality of points of wavefront aberrations are measured (the first to nth measurement points described later). In the pinhole reticle used here, a diffusing surface is provided thereon, and the pupil surface of the projection optical system PL is substantially comprehensive, so that the light from the pinhole pattern is distributed, and the projection optical system is thereby used. The comprehensive pupil surface of PL is used to measure wavefront aberration. In this embodiment, since the aperture diaphragm 15 is provided near the pupil surface of the projection > optical system PL, the wave surface aberration is measured at the pupil surface defined by the aperture diaphragm 15. _ After carrying the pinhole reticule, the main control device 50 uses the aforementioned reticule alignment detection system to detect the reticule alignment mark formed on the pinhole reticule. 'According to the test result, the pinhole marker The thread is aligned to a predetermined position. Thus, the center of the pinhole reticle is approximately the same as the optical axis of the projection optical system PL. Then, the main control device 50 supplies the control information TS to the light source 16 to cause the laser beam LB to emit light. As a result, the illumination 48 200400540 from the illumination optical system 2 is irradiated on the pinhole reticle. In addition, light emitted from a plurality of pinholes of the pinhole reticle passes through the projection optical system PL, is condensed on the image plane, and the pinhole image is formed on the image plane. Secondly, 'the imaging point of the main control device 50 in the image of any pinhole (hereinafter referred to as the eyelet pinhole) on the pinhole reticle is to coincide with the approximate center of the opening 82a of the wavefront aberration measurement device 80' While monitoring the measured value of the wafer interferometer 54W, the wafer stage WST is moved through the wafer stage driving section (not shown). At this time, according to the detection result of the focus position detection system (60a, 60b), the main control device 50 places the top of the glass cover 88 of the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 on the image surface of the pinhole image, and transmits it through The wafer L driving unit (not shown) drives the wafer table operation slightly in the two-axis direction. At this time, the tilt angle of the wafer table WST is also adjusted as necessary. As a result, the image beam of the eyelet pinhole passed through the central opening of the blood glass 88 of the glass cover 88, and entered the optical optical system 8 4. The 86 light receiving element receives light. Specifically, a spherical wave is generated from a pinhole on the eye of a pinhole reticle, and the spherical wave is transmitted through a projection optical system PL and an objective lens (which constitutes a wavefront aberration measurement device 80). The optical system for receiving light is shown in figure 84), relay lens 84b, reflector 84c, and collimator lens 84d, which form a powerful beam and irradiates the microlens array 84e. In this way, projection optics can be used Subsequent to the microlens array 84e, it is divided. Moreover, by the lens elements of the microlens array 84e, the respective light is focused on the light-receiving surface of the camera and the light-receiving part, respectively. The surface forms a pinhole image.
此時’右投影井學糸缔 DT ”L係無波面像差之理想光學 49 200400540 系統的話,則投影光學系統PL $瞳面之波面成為理相之 波面(此處係平面),其結果,射入微透鏡陣列84e之平Γ 光束成為平面波,該波面係理想之波面。這種情形,丁 3Α圖所示,在構成微透鏡陣列咏之各透鏡元件之光轴上 之位置,成像出點像(以下,也稱為「點」)。 然而,在投影光學系統PL t,通常,因波面像差存 在’故射入微透鏡陣列84e之平行光束之波面係從理相波 面偏移’一根據該偏移(即,波面對理想波面之傾斜),如第 3 B圖所不’各點之成後^署 4取诼位置從楗透鏡陣列84e之各 件之光軸上之位置偏移。這種情形’來自各點之基 各 透鏡元件光軸上之位置)位置之偏移,係對應波面之斜产: 又,射入構成受光部86之受光元件上之各聚光點之光 拖占像光束)’係用文光元件分別加以光電轉換,該光電轉 換信號係透過電氣電路,傳送到主控制裝1 5〇。主控制壯 置50根據該光電轉換信號’算出各點之成像位置,且= :該算出結果與已知之基準點位置資料,算出位置偏移(△ 、“),然後儲存在RAM中。此時,在主控制裝置 ’係供應晶圓干涉計54w此時之量測值%、^)。 如上述,若藉由1個所著眼針孔像之成像點之波面像 差量測裝i 8〇,量測點像位置偏移完成的話,則主控财 置50係在下—針孔像之成像點,移動晶圓台WST,以使 =面像差量測裝置80之開口 82a之大致中心一致。該移動 、’、。束後,與前述同樣的’藉由主控制裝置50,從光源16 進行雷射光束LB之發光,同樣地,藉由主控制裝置* 50 200400540 算出各點之成像位置。然後,在其他針孔像之成像點,依 序進行同樣之量測。 這樣-來,在完成必要之量測階段,在主控制裝置5〇 之RAM巾,儲存了前述各針孔像之成像點之位置偏移資At this time, if the "right projection well study DT" L is the ideal optics 49 200400540 system without wave surface aberrations, the wave surface of the projection optical system PL $ pupil surface becomes the wave surface of the rational phase (here is a plane). As a result, The flat Γ beam incident on the microlens array 84e becomes a plane wave, and the wave surface is an ideal wave surface. In this case, as shown in Fig. 3A, at the position on the optical axis of each lens element constituting the microlens array, an imaging point is formed. Image (hereinafter, also referred to as "dot"). However, in the projection optical system PL t, generally, because the wavefront aberration exists, the wavefront of the parallel beam incident on the microlens array 84e is shifted from the rational phase wavefront according to the offset (that is, the wave faces the ideal wavefront) After the completion of each point as shown in FIG. 3B, the position is shifted from the position on the optical axis of each element of the lens array 84e. In this case, the position shift from the position on the optical axis of each lens element) of each point is the oblique production corresponding to the wave front: Also, the light beams incident on the light-concentrating points on the light-receiving element constituting the light-receiving section 86 Occupying the image beam) 'is photoelectrically converted by the light-optical element, and the photoelectric conversion signal is transmitted to the main control device 150 through the electric circuit. The main control setup 50 calculates the imaging position of each point according to the photoelectric conversion signal, and =: the calculation result and the known reference point position data are used to calculate the position offset (△, "), and then stored in the RAM. At this time In the main control device, the measured value of the wafer interferometer 54w at this time is%, ^). As described above, if the wavefront aberration measurement device of the imaging point of the eyelet pinhole image is used, i 8〇, When the measurement point image position shift is completed, the main control device 50 is located at the imaging point of the bottom-pinhole image, and the wafer table WST is moved so that the approximate center of the opening 82a of the plane aberration measurement device 80 is consistent. After this movement, the beam is emitted, the laser beam LB is emitted from the light source 16 by the main control device 50 in the same manner as above, and the imaging position of each point is calculated by the main control device * 50 200400540. Then, the same measurement is sequentially performed at the imaging points of other pinhole images. In this way, at the completion of the necessary measurement stage, in the RAM towel of the main control device 50, the aforementioned imaging of each pinhole image is stored. Point offset
料(△ f、△ 與各成像點之座標資料(其係進行各針孔像 之成像點之量測之際,晶圓干涉計54W之量測值(乂丨、Υ )) 。又,在上述量測時,也可將照明光EL㈣照射在所有 之針孔,也可使用可動標線片遮簾3〇B,例如,在各針孔 ,變更標線片上照明領域之位置與大小等,用照明光虹 來只照明標線片上之所著眼針孔或部份領域(至少包含所著 眼針孔)。(△ f, △ and the coordinate data of each imaging point (which is the measurement value of the wafer interferometer 54W (际 丨, Υ) when measuring the imaging point of each pinhole image). Also, in During the above measurement, the illumination light EL㈣ can also be irradiated to all pinholes, or a movable graticule can be used to cover 30B. For example, the position and size of the lighting area on the graticule can be changed in each pinhole Use illumination iris to illuminate only the pinhole or part of the eye (at least including the pinhole of the eye) on the reticle.
其次,主控制裝置50根據RAM内所儲存之各針孔像 之成像點之位置偏移資料、△ ^)與各成像點之座標 資料’依照以下所說明之原理,對應針孔像之成像點,亦 即,投影光學系統PL之視野内之第測點(評價點) 〜第η量測點(評價點)之波面(波面像差),此處,此處係根 據轉換程式來運算後述之式(3)之條紋查淫克多項式(以下 簡稱為查涅克多項式」)之各項(查涅克項)之係數(例如 ’第1項之係婁文Ζ,〜第37項之係數ζ37)。本實施形態係 使用條紋查涅克多項式來作為查淫克多項式,進行以下之 說明者。 本實施形態係根據上述位置偏移(△ g、△々),根據 轉換程式來進行運算,藉此求出投影光學系統pL之波面 亦即位置偏移(Δ Ρ)成為仍然反映波面對理想 51 200400540 波面之斜度值,相反地,能根據位置偏移( 、 — 、f、△ ”)使 波面復原。又,由上述之位置偏移(△ $、 ^ Q々)與與波面 之物理性關係可知,本實施形態之波面算 了、j:y 1糸 么口Secondly, the main control device 50 corresponds to the imaging point of the pinhole image according to the principle explained below according to the positional offset data of the imaging point of each pinhole image, △ ^) and the coordinate data of each imaging point stored in the RAM. That is, the wavefront (wavefront aberration) from the measurement point (evaluation point) to the ηth measurement point (evaluation point) in the field of view of the projection optical system PL. Here, the calculation will be described later according to a conversion program. The coefficients of the terms (Chagneck term) of the stripe Chase polynomial of the formula (3) (hereinafter referred to as the Chagneck polynomial ") (for example, 'the first term is Lou Wen Z, the coefficient of the 37th term ζ37 ). In the present embodiment, the stripe Chaney polynomial is used as the Chase polynomial, and the following description will be made. In this embodiment, the calculation is performed according to the above-mentioned position shift (Δg, △ 々) according to the conversion program, thereby obtaining the wavefront of the projection optical system pL, that is, the position shift (ΔP), which still reflects the ideal wave surface. 51 200400540 The slope value of the wavefront, on the contrary, the wavefront can be restored based on the positional offset (, —,, f, △). In addition, the above-mentioned positional offset (△ $, ^ Q々) and the physical relationship with the wavefront It can be known from the sexual relationship that the wavefront of this embodiment is calculated, j: y 1 糸
Shack-Hartmann之波面算出原理者。 其次,針對根據上述之位置偏移,算出波面之方法, 加以簡單說明。 ’ ’ 如上述’位置偏移(△ f、△”係對應波面之斜产, 將位置偏移(△ $、△ π)積分,萨此喪 波面之形狀(嚴格 :“自基準面(理想波面)之偏移)。設波面(其係來自 基準面之偏移波面)之式為w(x,y),比例係數為 式(υ、(2)之關係式成立。 dx …⑴ Αη = ^ dy …(2) 因仍然不易積分僅表示點 壯你奴s ^ ,皮面斜度’故將面形 李场去 適合此式者。這種情形,級數係選擇正交 二t 了克多項式係適合軸對稱面展開之級數,圓周 方向係二角級數展開。 ^ . w 右用極座標糸統(ρ,θ)來表示 波面W的話’則能如下式(3)般展開。 吣蛛;ν(Αθ)…⑶Shack-Hartmann wave front calculation principle. Next, a method for calculating the wavefront based on the above-mentioned positional offset will be briefly described. '' As mentioned above 'The position shift (△ f, △) is the oblique production of the corresponding wave surface. The position shift (△ $, △ π) is integrated, and the shape of the funnel surface (strict: "from the reference surface (ideal wave surface) The offset of). Let the formula of the wave surface (which is the offset wave surface from the reference surface) be w (x, y) and the proportionality coefficient be the relationship of the formula (υ, (2). The relationship holds. Dx… ⑴ Αη = ^ dy… (2) because it is still not easy to integrate, it only represents the strong point of your slave s ^, and the slope of the leather surface 'so the surface shape Li field is adapted to this formula. In this case, the series system chooses the orthogonal two t t polynomial The series is suitable for the expansion of the axisymmetric plane, and the circumferential direction is the expansion of the diagonal series. ^. W If the wavefront W is represented by the polar coordinate system (ρ, θ) on the right, it can be expanded as shown in the following formula (3) Ν (Αθ) ... ⑶
因係正父糸統,故能猫 A 值來限定i #對廡 》、疋各項之係數Zi。用適當 7门士進行某種之濾波。又,例如,若愈俜數 zi同時例示第1項〜筮π T5 右/、係數 、之fi( Ρ,0 )(把ρ當作獨立變 52 200400540 數之向徑多項式)的話,則如下列表工所示。但是,表i中 之第37項係在實際之查涅克多項式中,相當於第49項, 但在本說明書中,係使用卜37之項(第37項)。即,在本 ,查淫克多項式項之數沒有特別限定。Since it is the patrilineal system of the father, the value of A can be used to define the coefficients Zi and i of each pair. Perform some filtering with the appropriate 7 monks. In addition, for example, if the number zi is instantiated at the same time from the first term to 筮 π T5 right /, coefficient, and fi (ρ, 0) (taking ρ as an independent variable 52 200400540 direction diameter polynomial), the following list Work shown. However, the 37th item in Table i is equivalent to the 49th item in the actual Zernike polynomial, but in this specification, the item 37 (item 37) is used. That is, in this case, the number of polynomial terms is not particularly limited.
z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8 Z9 z z z z z z z z z pcosQ p sin0 2ρ2Λ p 2cos2 0 p 2sin2 Θ (3 p 3-2 p )cos Θ (3 p 3-2 p )sin Θ 6p4-6p2+l p 3cos3 Θ p 3sin3 0 (4 p 4-3 p 2)cos 0 (4p4-3p2)sm0 (10 p 5-12 p 3+3 p )cos Θ (10 p 5-12 p 3+3 p )sin Θ 20/0^30/9^12^^1 p 4cos4 Θ p 4sin4 Θ Z19 ^20 Z21 ^22 ^23 ^24 z25 Z26 Z27 ^28 Z29 Z30 Zsi Z32 Z33 Z34 Z35 Z36 Z37 (5p5-4p3)cos3 0 (5 p 5-4 p 3)sin3 Θ (15p6-2〇p4+6p2)cos0 (15p6-2〇p4+6p2)sin0 (35 p 7-60 p 5+30 p 3-4 p )cos 0 (35 p 7-60 p 5+30 p 3-4 p )sin 0 70psA40p6+90p4-20p2+l p 5cos5 0 p 5sin5 Θ (6 p 6-5 p 4)cos4 Θ (6 p 6-5 p 4)sin4 Θ (21 p 7-30 p 5+l〇 p 3)cos3 0 (21 p 7-30 p 5+l〇 p 3)sin3 Θ (56 p 8-105 p 6+60 p 4-10 p 2)cos2 Θ (56 p 8-105 p 6+60 p 4-10 p 2)sin2 Θ (126 p 9-280 p 7+210 p 5-60 p 5+5 p )cos (9 (126 p 9-280 p 7+210 p 5-60 p 5+5 p )sin Θ 252 p 10-630 p 8+560 p 6-210 p 4+30 p 2-l 924 0 l2-2772 p 10+3150 p 8-1680 p 6+420 p 4-42 p 2+lz2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8 Z9 zzzzzzzzz pcosQ p sin0 2ρ2Λ p 2cos2 0 p 2sin2 Θ (3 p 3-2 p) cos Θ (3 p 3-2 p) sin Θ 6p4-6p2 + lp 3cos3 Θ p 3sin3 0 ( 4 p 4-3 p 2) cos 0 (4p4-3p2) sm0 (10 p 5-12 p 3 + 3 p) cos Θ (10 p 5-12 p 3 + 3 p) sin Θ 20/0 ^ 30 / 9 ^ 12 ^^ 1 p 4cos4 Θ p 4sin4 Θ Z19 ^ 20 Z21 ^ 22 ^ 23 ^ 24 z25 Z26 Z27 ^ 28 Z29 Z30 Zsi Z32 Z33 Z34 Z35 Z36 Z37 (5p5-4p3) cos3 0 (5 p 5-4 p 3) sin3 Θ (15p6-2〇p4 + 6p2) cos0 (15p6-2〇p4 + 6p2) sin0 (35 p 7-60 p 5 + 30 p 3-4 p) cos 0 (35 p 7-60 p 5 +30 p 3-4 p) sin 0 70psA40p6 + 90p4-20p2 + lp 5cos5 0 p 5sin5 Θ (6 p 6-5 p 4) cos4 Θ (6 p 6-5 p 4) sin4 Θ (21 p 7-30 p 5 + l〇p 3) cos3 0 (21 p 7-30 p 5 + l〇p 3) sin3 Θ (56 p 8-105 p 6 + 60 p 4-10 p 2) cos2 Θ (56 p 8- 105 p 6 + 60 p 4-10 p 2) sin2 Θ (126 p 9-280 p 7 + 210 p 5-60 p 5 + 5 p) cos (9 (126 p 9-280 p 7 + 210 p 5- 60 p 5 + 5 p) sin Θ 252 p 10-630 p 8 + 560 p 6-210 p 4 + 30 p 2-l 924 0 l2-2772 p 10 + 3150 p 8-1680 p 6 + 420 p 4- 42 p 2 + l
實際上’該微分係以上述之位置偏移來進行檢測,故 調整必須針對微係數來進行。極座標系統(X= P COS 0,y= p )係用下式(4)、(5)來表示。 3W _ dx dW 1 dW . a = cosy---sm0 dp p 8Θ …(4) dW dy " dW . Ω , ^ dW n =-sm ^ +--cos (9 dp p d0 …⑶ 因查涅克多項式之微分形不是正交系統,故調整必須 53 200400540 方Λ來進行。因1個點像成像點之資訊(偏移量) 統PL視野内之!向,故設針孔數為♦係對應投影光學系 明,例如< $測點(§平價點)數,本實施形態為了簡化說 程式之數為==),則上述式⑴〜⑺所表示之觀測方 (i小查之=員式之各項係對應光學像差。而且,低階項 項a」〜、赛德(Seidei)像差大致對應。使用查淫克多 、;’糟此能求出投影光學系統PL之波面像差。 轉換ΓΓ述之原理來決定轉換程式之運算步驟,依據該 轉換私式之運算虛 ΜActually, this differential system is detected by the above-mentioned position shift, so the adjustment must be performed for the differential coefficient. The polar coordinate system (X = P COS 0, y = p) is expressed by the following formulas (4) and (5). 3W _ dx dW 1 dW. A = cosy --- sm0 dp p 8Θ… (4) dW dy " dW. Ω, ^ dW n = -sm ^ +-cos (9 dp p d0… ⑶ Inzanne The differential fractal of the grams polynomial is not an orthogonal system, so adjustment must be performed on 53 200400540 square Λ. Because the information (offset) of a point image imaging point is in the direction of the PL field of view, the pinhole number is Corresponding to the projection optical system, for example, the number of measuring points (§ parity points), in this embodiment, to simplify the number of programs ==), the observation method represented by the above formulas ⑴ ~ ⑺ (i 小 查 之 = The terms of the crew type correspond to optical aberrations. In addition, the low-order terms a "~, and Seidei aberrations correspond approximately. Using Chase, it is possible to find the wavefront of the projection optical system PL. Aberrations: The principle described by the conversion ΓΓ determines the operation steps of the conversion program, and according to the conversion operation of the private formula,
視野内之第二 出對應投影光學系統PL 里測點〜第n量測點之波面資訊(波面像差) ,此處,能求出杳涅券$ ) 一 /圼克夕員式之各項係數,例如,求出第 1項之係數2丨〜第37項之係數237。 =述記憶裝置42内’記憶了投影光學系統PL之波 面像差變化表之資料庫。此声 次 、 处,所謂波面像差變化表係指 貝料組所構成之變化表,該資料組係根據既定之規則來 排列資料’該資料係表示調整參數之單位調整量之變化(盆 係=與投影光學系統PL 上之等效模型,進行模擬 ’來得到該模擬結果,將圖幸之如 口栗之杈影像之晶圓上之形成狀 悲取佳化)、與分別對應投影光學系統pL視野内之複數個 量測點之成像性能(具體而言’其係波面之資料,例如,杳 淫克多項式之第i項〜第37項係數之變動量)之關係。 本實施形態係使用可動透鏡13丨、"2、133、134'135 之各自由度方向(能驅動方向)之驅動景 〜里~ Χι、β y】、z 54 200400540 、0y5)、曰曰曰圓w表面(晶圓台w : 動量,,x,y)、及昭明光ELj由度方向之驅 〜明先E]L波長之偏移量△〕 之合計19個參數,來作為上述之調整參數。 處,針對上述波面像差變化表之資料庫之製作步赞 ’間早加以說明。首先,在安裝特定光學軟 'The second output in the field of view corresponds to the wavefront information (wavefront aberration) of the measurement point to the nth measurement point in the projection optical system PL. Here, the vignette coupon $) can be obtained. The coefficient is, for example, a coefficient 217 from the first term to a coefficient 237 from the 37th term. The database of the wavefront aberration change table of the projection optical system PL is stored in the memory device 42. Here, the so-called wave surface aberration change table refers to the change table formed by the shell material group. The data group arranges the data according to a predetermined rule. The data indicates the change of the unit adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter (pot system = Equivalent to the equivalent model on the projection optical system PL, perform the simulation 'to obtain the simulation result, and optimize the formation of the wafer on the wafer image, and correspondingly correspond to the projection optical system pL The relationship between the imaging performance of a plurality of measurement points in the field of view (specifically, the data of its wavefront, for example, the coefficients of the i-th to the 37th coefficients of the polynomial polynomial). In this embodiment, the driving scenes of the movable lenses 13 丨, " 2, 133, 134'135 are driven by the degree direction (driving direction) ~ mile ~ χ, β y], z 54 200400540, 0y5), said A total of 19 parameters of the circle w surface (wafer stage w: momentum, x, y) and Zhao Mingguang ELj driven by the degree direction ~ Ming Xian E] L wavelength offset △] as the above Adjustment parameters. Here, the steps for making the database of the wavefront aberration change table mentioned above are explained earlier. First, when installing specific optical software ''
腦中’輸入曝光裝置_之光學條件(例如,投影光學^ PL之设计值(數值孔徑NA、及各透鏡資料等卜相干 α值(照明σ )或照明光學系統之數值孔徑na、及昭 EL之波長(曝光波長)又等)。其次,在模擬用電腦邨中, 輸入投影光學系統PL視野内之任意第!量測點之資料。Optical conditions of 'input exposure device' in the brain (for example, design values of projection optics ^ PL (numerical aperture NA, and various lens data, such as coherent α values (illumination σ)) or numerical aperture na of illumination optical systems, and Zhao EL Wavelength (exposure wavelength) and so on). Second, in the simulation computer village, enter any number of measurement points in the projection optical system PL field of view.
接下來,輸入可動透鏡13l〜13s之各自由度方向(可動 方:)、曰曰曰® WS面之上述自由度方肖、照明光波長之偏 移量之各單位量之資料。例如,若在z方向偏移之+方向 ,輸入只驅動可動透鏡13l單位量之指令的話,則藉由模 擬用電腦46,針對投影光學系統Pl視野内之預定第9 1 = 測點,算出來自第1波面之理想波面之變化量之資料, 如’异出查涅克多項式之各項(例如,第1項〜第37項)之 係數變化量,該變化量之資料係顯示在模擬用電腦46之 顯示器之畫面上,並且,該變化量係以參數.PARAipi二 憶在記憶體中。 ° 其次,若在Y方向傾斜(X軸周圍之旋轉之+方向 ,輸入只驅動可動透鏡13!單位量之指令的話,則藉由才二 擬用電腦46,針對第1量測點,算出第2波面之資料,^ 55 200400540 T,算出查淫克多項式之上述各項係數之變化量,該變化 量之資料係顯示在上述顯示器之晝面上,並且,該變化量 係以參數PARA2P1記憶在記憶體中。 里Next, input the data of each unit amount of the moving direction of the movable lens 13l to 13s (movable side :), the above-mentioned degrees of freedom of the ® WS surface, and the deviation of the wavelength of the illumination light. For example, if an instruction to drive only 13l units of the movable lens is input in the + direction shifted in the z direction, the simulation computer 46 is used to calculate a predetermined 9 1 = measuring point in the field of view of the projection optical system P1. The data of the change amount of the ideal wave surface of the first wave surface, such as the coefficient change amount of each item of the Zernike polynomial (for example, the first item to the 37th item). The data of the change amount is displayed on the simulation computer. On the screen of the 46 display, and the change amount is recalled in the memory with the parameter .PARAipi. ° Secondly, if it is tilted in the Y direction (+ direction of rotation around the X axis, if the command to drive only the movable lens 13! Unit amount is input, then only the second measurement computer 46 is used to calculate the first measurement point for the first measurement point. 2 wave surface data, ^ 55 200400540 T, calculate the change amount of the above-mentioned coefficients of the Chase grams polynomial, the change amount data is displayed on the day surface of the above display, and the change amount is stored in the parameter PARA2P1 In memory
其次,若在X方向傾斜(y軸周圍之旋轉0幻之+方向 ’輸入只驅動可動透鏡13l單位量之指令的話,則藉由模 擬用,腦46,針對第!量測點,算出第3波面之資料,例 ^ ’算出查淫克多項式之上述各項係數之變化量,該變化 量之資料係顯示在上述顯示器之畫面上,並且,該變化量 係以參數PARA3P 1記憶在記憶體中。 旦以後’用與上述同樣之步驟,進行第2量測點〜第 量測點之各量測點之輸人,在每次分別進行可動透鏡η 之z方向移位、Y方向傾斜、X方向傾斜之指令輸入時, 係稭由模擬用電腦46,算出各量測點之第i波面、第2滅 _第波面之貝料’例如,各變化量之資料係顯示在‘顯 不為之書面上,计 g -上 並且,以 PARA1P2、 PARA2P2、 ARA3P2........PARA1Pn、PARA2Pn、PARA3Pn 記情Next, if the command to drive only 13l units of the movable lens is input by tilting in the X direction (rotation of 0 around the y axis + magic direction), the 3rd measurement point is calculated by the brain 46 for simulation, and the 3rd is calculated. Wave surface data, for example, ^ 'Calculate the variation of the above-mentioned coefficients of the Chase polynomial. The data of the variation is displayed on the screen of the above display, and the variation is stored in the memory with the parameter PARA3P 1 After that, using the same steps as above, the input of each measurement point from the second measurement point to the second measurement point is performed, and the z-direction shift, the y-direction tilt, and the x-direction of the movable lens η are performed each time. When the direction tilt command is input, the computer 46 of the simulation is used to calculate the i-th wave surface and the second wave-th wave surface of each measurement point. For example, the data of each change amount is displayed as 'significant.' In writing, count g-up and record PARA1P2, PARA2P2, ARA3P2 ......... PARA1Pn, PARA2Pn, PARA3Pn
在記憶體中。 " ㈣關於其他m 13^4、135,也用與上述同樣之 +方A ^仃各!測點之輸入、與在各自由度方向,分別在 向只驅動單位量之指令輪人,對應此,藉由模擬用電 針對在各自由度方向只驅動可動透鏡 U;: 13弋位量之際之第1〜第η量測點,算出波面資料 、士"出查涅克多項式之各項變化量,參數(PARA4P1 RA5P1、PARA6pi、....... PARA15P1)、參數 56 200400540 (PARA4P2、PARA5P2、PARA6P2........PARA15P2)、 參數(PARA4Pn 、PARA5Pn 、PARA6Pn ........ PARA15Pn)係記憶在記憶體内。 又,關於晶圓W,係用與上述同樣之步驟,進行各量 測點之輸入、與在各自由度方向,分別在+方向只驅動單 位量之指令輸入,對應此,藉由模擬用電腦46,分別針對 在Z、0 X、0 y自由度方向只驅動晶圓W單位量之際之第 1〜第η量測點,算出波面資料,例如,算出查涅克多項 式之各項變化量,參數(PARA16P1 、PARA17P1 、 PARA18P1)、參數(PARA16P2、PARA17P2、PARA18P2)、 .......參數(PARA16Pn、PARA17Pn、PARA18Pn 係記憶在 記憶體内。 進一步,關於波長移位,也與上述同樣之步驟,進行 各量測點之輸入、與在+方向使波長只移位單位量之指令 輸入,對應此,藉由模擬用電腦46,分別針對在+方向只 使波長移位單位量之際之第1〜第η量測點,算出波面資 料,例如,算出查涅克多項式之各項變化量,參數 (PARA19P1、PARA19P2........PARA 1 9Ρη)係記憶在記憶 體内。 此處,上述各參數PARAiPj(i=l〜19,j = l〜η)係37行 1列之列矩陣(縱向量)。即,若η=33的話,關於調整參數 PARA1,則成為下式(6)。又,參數PARAiPj都是矩陣, 至於下式(6)以下之式,為了方便起見,採用行矩陣般之表 現形式。 57 200400540 PARA\PI = [ZU Zl2 ……2137] , PARA\P2 = [Z2>1 Z2f2 ·····.Z2 1 : J U(6) PARAlPn = [z33 j Z33 2 ......233 37 j 又,關於調整參數PARA2,則成為下式(?)。 Λ4題尸1 = [ZU Zu …···2137] ]In memory. " ㈣For other m 13 ^ 4, 135, also use the same + party A ^ 仃 each! The input of the measuring point and the commander who only drive a unit amount in the direction of the respective degree, respectively, corresponding to this, by simulating electricity for driving only the movable lens U in the direction of the respective degree ;: 13 The first to nth measurement points of the world, calculate the wavefront data, all the changes in the Zernike polynomial, parameters (PARA4P1 RA5P1, PARA6pi, ... PARA15P1), parameter 56 200400540 ( PARA4P2, PARA5P2, PARA6P2, ..., PARA15P2), parameters (PARA4Pn, PARA5Pn, PARA6Pn, ..., PARA15Pn) are stored in the memory. For wafer W, the same steps as described above are used to input each measurement point, and to input only a unit amount command in the direction of each degree and in the + direction, respectively. Corresponding to this, a simulation computer is used. 46. Calculate wavefront data for the 1st to ηth measurement points when only the wafer W unit quantity is driven in the directions of Z, 0 X, and 0 y degrees of freedom, for example, calculate the various changes in the Zernike polynomial. The parameters (PARA16P1, PARA17P1, PARA18P1), parameters (PARA16P2, PARA17P2, PARA18P2), ... parameters (PARA16Pn, PARA17Pn, PARA18Pn) are stored in the memory. Further, the wavelength shift is also the same as the above In the same steps, input of each measurement point and the instruction input of shifting the wavelength by only a unit amount in the + direction are corresponding. Accordingly, the simulation computer 46 is used to shift the wavelength by only a unit amount in the + direction. For the first to nth measurement points, calculate the wavefront data. For example, calculate the changes of the various Zernike polynomials. The parameters (PARA19P1, PARA19P2 ........ PARA 1 9Pη) are stored in the memory. Here, the above parameters PARAiPj (i = 1 to 19, j = 1 to η) is a column matrix (vertical amount) of 37 rows and 1 column. That is, if η = 33, the adjustment parameter PARA1 becomes the following formula (6). Also, The parameters PARAiPj are all matrices. As for the following formula (6), for the sake of convenience, a row matrix-like expression is used. 57 200400540 PARA \ PI = [ZU Zl2 …… 2137], PARA \ P2 = [Z2 > 1 Z2f2 ·····. Z2 1: JU (6) PARAlPn = [z33 j Z33 2 ...... 233 37 j Moreover, regarding the adjustment parameter PARA2, it becomes the following formula (?). Λ4Question 1 = [ZU Zu… ··· 2137]]
PARA2P2 = [Z2fl Ζ2>2 ······223J : J …⑺ PARAlPn = [z331 Z33 2 ......233 37 jPARA2P2 = [Z2fl Z2 > 2 ····· 223J: J… ⑺ PARAlPn = [z331 Z33 2 ...... 233 37 j
同樣地,關於其他之調整參數PARA3〜PARA19,也 成為下式(8)。 PARA3P1 = 1^1,1 ^1,2 r ·Α37] PARA3P2= lU2,2 · •·Α37] PARA3Pn= [^33,1 ^33,2 · •…233,37] PARA19P1: = 1¾¾ … r PARA19P2 之2,37] PARA\9Pn : -[Ζ331 Ζ33 2 · ^33,37.Similarly, the other adjustment parameters PARA3 to PARA19 also have the following formula (8). PARA3P1 = 1 ^ 1,1 ^ 1,2 r · Α37] PARA3P2 = lU2,2 · • · Α37] PARA3Pn = [^ 33,1 ^ 33,2 · • ... 233,37] PARA19P1: = 1¾¾… r PARA19P2 No. 2,37] PARA \ 9Pn:-[Z331 ZZ33 2 · ^ 33,37.
因此,這樣一來,列矩陣(縱向量,其係由記憶體内所 。己憶之查涅克多項式之各項係數之變化量所構成)PARA丨p工 〜PARA19Pn係集中在各調整參數,進行交替並排來作為 19個調整參數之波面像差變化表。其結果,作成以列矩陣 (縱向量)PARA1P1〜PARA19Pn為要素之次式(9)所示之矩 陣(行列)〇。又,在式(9)中,m=19。 58 200400540 PARA1PI PARA2P1 PARA1P2 PARA2P2 PARAmPl PARAmP2 •⑼ PARAmPn PARAlPn PARAlPn 因此,貧料庫(其係由這樣所作成之投影光學系統Therefore, in this way, the column matrix (longitudinal quantity, which is composed of the internal memory. The amount of change in the coefficients of the recalled Zernike polynomials) PARA 丨 p ~ PARA19Pn is concentrated on the adjustment parameters, Alternate side by side is used as a wavefront aberration change table of 19 adjustment parameters. As a result, a matrix (row and column) represented by the following equation (9) with the column matrix (vertical amount) PARA1P1 to PARA19Pn as elements is prepared. In Equation (9), m = 19. 58 200400540 PARA1PI PARA2P1 PARA1P2 PARA2P2 PARAmPl PARAmP2 • ⑼ PARAmPn PARAlPn PARAlPn Therefore, the lean material library (which is a projection optical system made by
之波面像差變化表所構成)係儲存在記憶裝 PL 以 < 内部。 其次,關於在本實施形態之曝光裝置1〇〇 所進行’用來調整投影光學系統PL之圖宰 口木1豕之成像狀態 之可動透鏡Ui-Uj等之前述19個之調整參數之設定方 法,即,投影光學系統PL之一般調整方法,包含其原理 說明加以詳述。 ” 首先’用述步驟,使用波面像差量測裝置來量測 投影光學系統PL之波面像差。該量測結果,即,求出對 應投影光學系統PL視野内之第丨量測點(評價點)〜第n量 測點(評價點)之波面(波面像差)之資料,即,求出查涅克多 項式之各項’例如,求出第i項係數&〜第37項之係數 Z37,記憶在主控制裝置5〇之RAM等之記憶體内。 在以下之說月中,能用下式(1 〇)之列矩P車Q來表示對 應第1量測點〜第η量測點之波面(波面像差)資料。The wave surface aberration change table) is stored in the memory device PL < Next, the method of setting the aforementioned 19 adjustment parameters of the movable lens Ui-Uj and the like used to adjust the imaging state of the image of the projection optical system PL in the exposure system 100 of the present embodiment is used to adjust the imaging state of the projection optical system PL. That is, the general adjustment method of the projection optical system PL includes a detailed description of its principle. "First, using the steps described above, a wavefront aberration measurement device is used to measure the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL. The measurement result is to find the corresponding measurement point (evaluation in the field of view of the projection optical system PL) Point) to the n-th measurement point (evaluation point) of the wavefront (wavefront aberration), that is, to find the terms of the Zernike polynomial ', for example, to find the coefficient of the i-th term & the coefficient of the 37th term Z37 is stored in the RAM of the main control device 50, etc. In the following months, the corresponding moment from the first measurement point to the nth amount can be expressed by the moment P car Q of the following formula (10). Wavefront (wavefront aberration) data of the measurement points.
Q •(10) 59 200400540 又’在上式(1〇)中,矩陳西主 早Q之要素Ρ!〜Ρη係列矩陣(縱 向Ϊ,其係分別由杳涅秀多 笪,圼充夕項式之第1項〜第37項之係 數(Zi〜Ζ37)所構成)。 t’藉由主㈣裝置5G’如以下所述,運算前述之 可動透鏡131〜ΐ3ς之久ό i / 5之各自由度方向之調整量、晶圓W之各 自由度方向之调整量昭明杏 里…、明光EL之波長移位量。 即,在對應第i署消丨點〜# ^ 次 、 、”、弟n置測點之波面(波面像差 )貧料Q、前述資料庫丨束 十犀(矩陣〇)、前述19個調整量P之間 ’下式(π)之關係成立。 n (11)Q • (10) 59 200400540 Also in the above formula (10), the elements of the early Q's Q, P! ~ Pη series of matrices (longitudinal unitary, which are respectively represented by 杳 Nixiuduo 笪, 圼 Chongxi terms Coefficients (Zi ~ Z37) of the 1st to 37th terms). t 'by the main device 5G', as described below, calculates the adjustment amount of the respective directions of the movable lens 131 to 3ΐ i / 5 and the adjustment amount of the respective directions of the wafer W. ..., the amount of wavelength shift of bright light EL. That is, the wavefront (wavefront aberration) at the measurement point corresponding to the i-th elimination point ~ # ^ times,, "", the lean material Q, the aforementioned database 丨 beam ten rhino (matrix 0), and the aforementioned 19 adjustments The relationship of the following formula (π) between the quantities P holds: n (11)
Q = 0 · P 在上式(11)中,P係用下式(12)來表示之⑽(即19個 )之要素所構成之列矩陣(即縱向量)。 ADJ1 ADJ2 P, •(12) ADJmQ = 0 · P In the above formula (11), P is a column matrix (ie, a longitudinal quantity) composed of the elements (i.e., 19) represented by the following formula (12). ADJ1 ADJ2 P, • (12) ADJm
因此’根據上式(12)進行下M 1 )退仃下式(13)之運算,即,藉由最 小平方法’能求出p之各要素Am ! Λ 受I ADJ1〜ADJm,即,可求出 可動透鏡^丨〜135之各自由声太a 目由度方向之調整量(目標調整量 、晶圓W之各自由度方向之胡敕 ^ 、 又乃同之凋整1 (目標調整量)、及照明 光EL之波長移位量(目標移位量)。 Ρ = (Οτ · Ο)1 · 〇τ · ο · / V ......(13) 在上式(1 3)中,〇 τ传杆η 你仃列〇之轉置矩陣,(Οτ ·〇)-1係 200400540 (〇τ · 0)之反矩陣。 因此,主控制裝置50係將記憶裝置42内之資料庫依 序讀入到RAM内,算出調整量ADJ1〜ADJm。 其次,主控制裝置50係根據記憶裝置42所記憶之 ADJ1〜ADJ15,將各自由度方向驅動可動透鏡13ι〜ΐ35之 指令值供應給成像性能修正控制器48。因此,藉由成像性 能修正控制器48,對各自由度方向驅動可動透鏡Πι〜135 之各驅動元件來控制施加電壓,可動透鏡Πι〜ΐ35之位置 及方式之至少一方大致同時調整 50係在實際掃描曝光時,在z、 。與此同時,主控制裝置 ^ X、Θ y之各自由度方向Therefore, 'the following M 1 is performed according to the above formula (12), and the calculation of the following formula (13) is performed, that is, by using the least square method, the elements Am of p can be obtained! I Λ receives I ADJ1 ~ ADJm, that is, Calculate the adjustment amount of the movable lens ^ ~~ 135 in the direction of the direction of the lens (target adjustment amount, the amount of the wafer W in each direction of the direction ^^, and the same adjustment 1 (target adjustment amount ), And the wavelength shift amount (target shift amount) of the illumination light EL. P = (Οτ · Ο) 1 · 〇τ · ο · / V ... (13) In the above formula (1 3) In 〇τ, the transpose matrix of your queue 〇, (〇τ · 〇) -1 is the inverse matrix of 200400540 (〇τ · 0). Therefore, the main control device 50 is a database in the memory device 42 Read into RAM in order, and calculate the adjustment amount ADJ1 ~ ADJm. Second, the main control device 50 supplies the command values of 13 ° ~ 1335, which drive the movable lens 13 ° ~ 35, respectively, according to the ADJ1 ~ ADJ15 stored in the memory device 42. The performance correction controller 48. Therefore, by the imaging performance correction controller 48, each of the driving elements that drive the movable lens 11 to 135 in the degree direction is controlled. At least one of the positions and methods of the movable lens Πι to ΐ35 is adjusted at the same time based on the applied voltage, and the 50 is used in the actual scanning exposure at z,. At the same time, the main control devices ^ X, Θ y are freely oriented.
,將用來驅動晶圓w之指令值供應給晶圓台驅動部(未圖 不)’來驅動晶圓台WST,以使在曝光領域IA内,晶圓w 經常保持與藉由調整量ADJ16〜ADJ18來調整之值等效之 方式。並且’與上述各㈣之同時,主控㈣S 50係根 據調整量ADJ19供應指令給光源、16,使照明A EL之波長 移位。藉此,使投影光學系統PL之光學特性,例如,崎~ 變、像面彎曲、慧形像差、球面像差、及像散像差等受到 修正。又、關於慧形像差、球面像差、及像散像差,其低 階及高階像差都能得到修正。The command value for driving the wafer w is supplied to the wafer stage driving section (not shown) to drive the wafer stage WST, so that in the exposure area IA, the wafer w is always maintained with the adjustment amount ADJ16 ~ ADJ18 is an equivalent way to adjust the value. In addition, at the same time as the above, the main control unit S 50 supplies a command to the light source 16 according to the adjustment amount ADJ19 to shift the wavelength of the lighting A EL. As a result, the optical characteristics of the projection optical system PL, such as variability, curvature of field, coma aberration, spherical aberration, and astigmatic aberration, are corrected. In addition, with regard to coma aberration, spherical aberration, and astigmatic aberration, both low-order and high-order aberrations can be corrected.
其次,針對投影光學系統PL之調整方法(其係以本實 施形態之曝光裝置10〇所進行之正交2軸方向之線圖案像 彼此之線寬差之調整為目的)’順著第4圖之流程圖,且適 當地參照其他之圖面,加以說明。 首先’在第4圖之步驟102巾,係用前述步驟,使用 61 200400540 波面像差里測裝置8〇,來量測投影光學系統 差,其量剛結果,即,求出投影光學系統像 處’ η%)之量測點(評價點)之查埋克多項式之久 ,例如,求出望】苗夕总去 、 σ項 "瓦出弟1項之係數Ζι〜第37項之37項之 z37 ’然後冗憶在主控制裝置5〇之ram等記憶體内。 、在I步驟104中’以下所說明之量測用標線片 以下:間稱「標線片Rt」)係承載在標線片# RST上,二 ! w=:晶圓(方便上,簡稱「晶圓^」)係承載在二Next, an adjustment method for the projection optical system PL (which is for the purpose of adjusting the line width difference between the line pattern images in the orthogonal 2 axis direction performed by the exposure device 100 of this embodiment) is shown in FIG. 4 The flowchart is explained with reference to other drawings as appropriate. First, in step 102 of FIG. 4, the foregoing steps are used to measure the projection optical system difference using 61 200400540 wavefront aberration measuring device 80. The result is just the result, that is, the image of the projection optical system is obtained. 'η%) of the measurement point (evaluation point) of the check polygram for a long time, for example, to find hope] Miao Xi always go, the σ term " the coefficient of the 1st term of the Watt brother ~ 37 of 37 Zhi z37 'is then memorized in memory such as ram of the main control device 50. 2. In step 104, 'the following reticle for measurement described below: occasionally called "reticle Rt") is carried on the reticle # RST, two! W =: wafer (for convenience, abbreviated "Wafer ^")
口 。_線片Rt之承載與晶圓WT之承載係在主 柽制展置50之指不下’藉由未圖示之標線片承 圓承載器來進行。 3mouth . The carrying of the wire segment Rt and the wafer WT are carried out at the position of the main frame display 50 or less' by a reticle-bearing circular carrier (not shown). 3
此處,針對標線片Rt,根據第5圖加以說明。第5圖 係從圖案面側來看標線片&之平面圖。如第5圖所示,標 線片RT係形成長方形之圖案㈣pA,其係具有由正方: 之玻璃基板所構成,與在該圖案面之中央部被遮光帶SB 圍住之照明領域IAR大致同樣之形狀。在圖案領域pA之 内部形成合計33個之量測用圖案用圖案ΜΡι〜Μρ^。各 里測用圖案]MP’l〜33),例如,當標線片尺丁(圖案領域 PA)之中心與投影光學系、统pL之光軸Αχ—致日夺,係設定 該位置,則吏酉己置在對應量測前述波面像差之投影光學系 統PL有效視野内之各量測點(評價點)之位置。 各量測用圖案ΜΡ〗係如第5圖所示,包含γ軸方向延 伸之設計上之線寬(例如,6〇〇nm)之第i線圖案與χ軸方 向延伸之设计上之線寬(例如,6〇〇nm)之第2線圖案。若將 62 200400540 投影光學系統PL之投影倍率設定為1/4,將第丨線圖案與 第2線圖案轉印到晶圓上的話,則在投影光學系統ρι上 ,不存在球面像差、像散像差等各像差之理想狀態下,就 第1線圖案與第2線圖案之像而言,分別能得到線寬 150nm之線圖案像。Here, the reticle Rt will be described with reference to FIG. 5. Fig. 5 is a plan view of the reticle & viewed from the pattern surface side. As shown in FIG. 5, the reticle RT forms a rectangular pattern ㈣pA, which is composed of a square: glass substrate, which is approximately the same as the lighting area IAR surrounded by a light shielding band SB in the central portion of the pattern surface. Its shape. A total of 33 measurement patterns for measurement patterns ΜΡι ~ Μρ ^ are formed inside the pattern area pA. The pattern for each measurement] MP'l ~ 33). For example, when the center of the reticle ruler (pattern area PA) and the optical axis AX of the projection optical system and the system pL are all set to this position, then The operator has placed the measurement points (evaluation points) within the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL for measuring the aforementioned wavefront aberrations. Each measurement pattern MP is a line width on the design including the line width (for example, 600 nm) in the design extending in the γ-axis direction and a line width in the design extending on the χ-axis direction as shown in FIG. 5. (For example, 600 nm) a second line pattern. If the projection magnification of 62 200400540 projection optical system PL is set to 1/4, and the first line pattern and the second line pattern are transferred to the wafer, there will be no spherical aberration or image on the projection optical system ρ. Under ideal conditions of various aberrations such as astigmatism, a line pattern image with a line width of 150 nm can be obtained for the images of the first line pattern and the second line pattern, respectively.
又’在通過圖案領域PA中心(與標線片中心一致)之X 軸上之圖案領域p A之兩外側,形成標線片調準記號(M i、 M2)。該標線片Rt係承載在標線片台RST上之狀態下,圖 案面(第5圖中,紙面前側之面)成為與投影光學系統卩乙對 向側之面。 在第5圖中,在下一步驟1〇6中進行標線片調準。該 標線片調準,例如,在日本特開平7_176468號公報及對應 該公報之美國專利5,646,413號等中,為了詳細揭示,主 控制裝置50係使用前述之標線片調準檢測系統,分別檢 測標線片RT所形成之標線片調準記號(M1、M2)與對應這 些形成在晶圓台wst上之基準記號板FM上之基^記號之 位置偏移,根據δ亥檢測結果,調整標線片台丁之XY面 内之位置(包含旋轉),藉此進行以使兩者位置偏移為最 小。藉由該標線片調準,標線片Rt之中心與投影光學系統 PL之光軸大致一致。 在下一步驟108中,係在既定之照明條件下,配置在 照明領域IAR内之標線片Rt之各量測用圖案Μρ』係透過 投影光學系統PL’將標線片台RST及晶圓台wst靜止地 轉印在晶圓wT上,圖案領域PA内之量測用圖案mPj之像 63 200400540 (潛像)係形成在晶圓w # τ表面所塗佈之光阻層。又,主批制 裝置50係根據焦點位置 寻工制 β、, 罝铋測系統(6〇a、60b)之檢測結果, 在Ϊ測用圖案MP·之像点禮苑 篆成像之像面,使晶圓WT表面一茲 ’透過晶圓台驅動部(未PJ 如 丨(禾圖不),在z軸方向使晶圓台 稍微驅動,視需要,晶圓△ 曰曰W台WST之傾斜角也加以調 又,使晶圓台WST步進銘叙 产曰门 移動,在日日圓wT上之複數個領域 上,當然也可以依序轉£卩_ & 、次 π得中線片RT之圖案領域PA。 在下一步驟1 1 0中,μ、+、彿Μ υ 上述私線片RT上之量測用圖Also, on both outer sides of the pattern area p A on the X axis passing through the center of the pattern area PA (which coincides with the center of the reticle), a reticle alignment mark (M i, M2) is formed. The reticle Rt is a state where the reticle Rt is carried on the reticle table RST, and the pattern surface (the surface on the front side of the paper in FIG. 5) becomes the surface facing the projection optical system 卩 B. In Figure 5, the reticle alignment is performed in the next step 106. This reticle alignment is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7_176468 and the corresponding U.S. Patent No. 5,646,413. For detailed disclosure, the main control device 50 uses the aforementioned reticle alignment detection system to detect each The position deviation of the reticle alignment marks (M1, M2) formed by the reticle RT and the base ^ marks on the reference mark plate FM formed on the wafer table wst is adjusted according to the δH detection result. The position (including rotation) in the XY plane of the graticule table is performed to minimize the position deviation between the two. By the alignment of the reticle, the center of the reticle Rt is approximately the same as the optical axis of the projection optical system PL. In the next step 108, under the predetermined lighting conditions, each measurement pattern Mρ of the reticle Rt arranged in the lighting field IAR is used to pass the reticle stage RST and the wafer stage through the projection optical system PL '. The wst is statically transferred on the wafer wT, and the image of the measurement pattern mPj in the pattern area PA 63 200400540 (latent image) is a photoresist layer coated on the surface of the wafer w # τ. In addition, the main batch manufacturing device 50 is based on the detection results of the focus detection system β, and the bismuth measurement system (60a, 60b). Let the wafer WT surface pass through the wafer stage driving section (not PJ such as (not shown), and drive the wafer stage slightly in the z-axis direction. If necessary, the wafer △ is the tilt angle of the W stage WST It is also adjusted to move the wafer table WST step-by-step to the production gate. Of course, in multiple fields on the Japanese yen, wT, of course, it can also be transferred in sequence from £ 卩 & Pattern area PA. In the next step 110, μ, +, Buddha Μ υ Measurement chart on the above-mentioned private line piece RT
MPj所轉印之晶圓\\^择柄姑^ τ係根據末自主控制裝置5〇之指示, 從晶圓台WST下載,在曝# ^ 牡曝九衷置100中,用線内(ilMin 連接之未圖示之光阻塗佈顯影裝置(_r devei。叫中, 藉由未圖示之搬送系統來傳送。 在下/驟112中,主控制裝置5〇係將指示供應給冷 佈顯影裝置之控制系統’根據該指示,藉由未圖示之塗: 顯影裝置’在晶® Wt上,形成量測用㈣MPj之光阻像 在下-步驟114巾’該顯影後之晶圓^係與前述同 樣,再承載在晶圓台WST上。 在下一步驟116中,進行晶圓Wt上之量測用圖案 ΜΡ〕之光阻之線寬量測。該線寬量測,例如,係藉由主控 制裝置50,在XY面内移動晶圓台WST,使用調準系統 alg,依序攝影晶m Wt上之至少i個量測用圖案MPj之 光阻像,根據該攝影之結果所得到之攝影信號,來進行既 定之處理(包含運算)。其結果,在各投影光學系統pL之評 64 200400540 價點(量測1The wafer transferred by MPj is selected from the wafer table WST according to the instructions of the autonomous control device 50, and is placed in the exposure # ^ exposure to 100 inline (ilMin The connected unillustrated photoresist coating and developing device (_r devei.) Is called, and is conveyed by the unshown conveying system. In the next / step 112, the main control device 50 will supply instructions to the cold cloth developing device. The control system 'according to this instruction, by the unillustrated coating: developing device' on the crystal Wt, forming a photoresistance image of the measurement ㈣MPj is next-step 114 'The developed wafer ^ is the same as previously Similarly, it is carried on the wafer table WST. In the next step 116, the line width measurement of the photoresist of the measurement pattern MP on the wafer Wt is performed. The line width measurement is, for example, performed by the main The control device 50 moves the wafer stage WST in the XY plane, and uses the alignment system alg to sequentially photograph the photoresist images of at least i measurement patterns MPj on the crystal m Wt. Signal to perform predetermined processing (including calculations). As a result, the evaluation of each projection optical system pL 64 2004 00540 Price point (measurement 1
Mpj,求出第1線圖案 1線寬L1與第2線圖案 2線寬L2,然後儲存在 站),gp,各量測用圖案 像(坆種情形係指光阻像)線寬之第 象(這種丨月形係指光阻像)線寬之第 RAM等之計憶體内。 50係根據上述所求出 寬L2,求出有關各量 然後儲存在RAM等 在下—步驟11 8中,主控制裝置 之各里測用圖案MPj之線寬L1與線 測用圖案ΜΡ』之線寬差△ L=u 一 L2 之記憶體内。Mpj, find the line width L1 of the first line pattern 1 and the line width L2 of the second line pattern 2 and store them at the station), gp, the pattern width of each measurement pattern image (in this case, the photoresist image) The width of the image (such as the moon-shaped image refers to the photoresistance image) of the RAM and other devices in the body. 50 is based on the width L2 obtained from the above, and the relevant quantities are obtained and stored in the RAM and the like below. In step 11-8, the line width L1 of the measurement pattern MPj and the line measurement pattern MP ′ of the main control device are measured. The width difference △ L = u-L2 in the memory.
此處’針對晶K Wt上之複數個 量測用圖案MP夕絲e ? 田進订上述 領域,來Ρ ] 阻之形成時’係針對各複數 — 仃上述線寬量測、線寬差之算出。這種情彤 也可將從各複數個領域所得到" 至⑷丄 士里⑻用圖案MP丨之線 差(例如,單純平均值)當作各量測用圖 這種情形,藉由平妁仆—里此曰 」之綠見至 危L上、 由千均效果,使$測誤差減低,能更高; 度地求出各量測用圖案Mp / ^ ^ ^ ^ j深見差(即弟1線圖案(縱、彳Here, 'for the plurality of measurement patterns MP and silk on the crystal K Wt e? Tian Jinde said the above fields, to P] the formation of resistance' is for each complex number-仃 the above line width measurement, line width difference Figure it out. This kind of feeling can also be obtained from the plural areas " to the line difference (for example, the simple average) of the pattern MP 丨 used as a measure for each measurement.妁 妁 — 里 说说 ”The green sees the critical L, and the effect of Qianjun reduces the measurement error of $, which can be higher; find out the measurement patterns Mp / ^ ^ ^ ^ Brother 1 line pattern (vertical, 彳
,^「與第2線圖案(縱線圖案)之像線寬之差(以-%為縱橫線之線寬差」))。 在下一步驟120中,係根據各 严 差AL盘杳、、里W點之緃杈線之们 1第;^ 項式之第12項之係數‘之值(大小), a又疋弟9項之係數Z9 〇 關於任一個評價點,根據波面像差之量賴 到弟12項之係數、不是零,即,在表…存在 以4階(/〇之階數為4階 、n〜 凤切不表不之高階像散像 差者。这係如…之模擬結果所示,當^為零,即當 65 200400540 VOm又時,係與4階〇θ成份之第9項之係數乙之大小 無關’光瞳孔面内之波面在任一方向都成為同樣之錯亂方 式。由此可知’ Ζΐ2=0,即在第6圖中之上段(第Μ圖〜第 圖)在任一圖面上,描繪由複數個同心圓所構成之等 焉線圖形。 I3右Ζ丨2 〇 ’此處,因作為目的之縱橫線之線寬差 :控制(調整)困難,故關於任一個評價點,以波面像差: f測結果所得到之S 12項之k係數係假設為零者。至於 實際之投影光學系、统’在視野内之任—個評價點,通常展 開波面像差之查淫克多項式之第12項之Z12係數不是零: k種假定可說是符合實情者。 又’在本實施形態中’所謂設定第9項之係數 進行以下處理之意。 、曰 即,在各評價點根據縱橫線之線寬差△L與查涅 員式之弟12項之係數Zi2值(大小),進行既^之運算 項之係數Z9之變化量之目標值^......... 關於該算出之依據,容後述p曾 2 33)( )^出把其他項變化量之目標 =作零之下式⑽來表示之波面像差之變化量之目標值 4 Q,= ·: [Pn\ 66 200400540 在上式(14)中,各要素 分別用下式(15J、(152)、… 之列矩陣(列向量)。 P】,、P,12、…...、V(n …、Π5η)來表示之3? 行 33)係 1列, ^ "Difference from the image line width of the second line pattern (vertical line pattern) (the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines")). In the next step 120, the value (size) of the coefficient of the twelfth term of the ^ term formula is based on the values of the 1 and 2 points of the branch line at the points AL, 里, and W, and the 9th term of a Coefficient Z9 〇 Regarding the amount of wavefront aberration depends on the coefficient of wavefront aberration, the coefficient of Z12 is not zero, that is, there are 4th order (the order of / 0 is 4th order, n ~ Fengqian) Those who do not express high-order astigmatic aberrations. As shown in the simulation results of…, when ^ is zero, that is, when 65 200400540 VOm is again, it is the magnitude of the coefficient B of the ninth term of the fourth-order 0θ component Irrelevant, the wave surface in the pupil plane becomes the same chaotic pattern in either direction. From this we can see that 'Zΐ2 = 0, that is, in the upper part of Fig. 6 (Fig. M ~ Fig.) I3 right contour pattern composed of a plurality of concentric circles. I3 right Z 丨 2 〇 'Here, because the line width difference between the vertical and horizontal lines as the purpose: control (adjustment) is difficult, wavefront aberration is used for any evaluation point. : The k coefficient of the S 12 term obtained from the f measurement result is assumed to be zero. As for the actual projection optical system, the system's task in the field of view-an evaluation Point, the Z12 coefficient of the twelfth term of the checker polynomial of the wavefront aberration is usually not zero: k kinds of assumptions can be said to be true. Also, in this embodiment, the so-called coefficient of the ninth term is set as follows That is, at each evaluation point, the amount of change in the coefficient Z9 of the calculated operation term is calculated based on the line width difference ΔL of the vertical and horizontal lines and the coefficient Zi2 value (size) of the twelve terms of the Chanelian brother. The target value ^ ......... Regarding the basis for this calculation, we will describe p. 2 33) () ^ The target of the change amount of other terms = the wavefront aberration expressed by the following formula ⑽ The target value of the change amount 4 Q, = ·: [Pn \ 66 200400540 In the above formula (14), each element is a column matrix (column vector) of the following formula (15J, (152), .... P] ,, P, 12, ......, V (n ..., Π5η) 3? Row 33) is a column
Ρ2- •V 〇 ^1,8 0 z SS 心1,9 ^1,10 0 ^1,37 0 %· _0· ^2,8 0 ^2,9 s= r2 ^2,10 0 ^2,37 0 (152) (15,)Ρ2- • V 〇 ^ 1,8 0 z SS heart 1,9 ^ 1,10 0 ^ 1,37 0% · _0 · ^ 2,8 0 ^ 2,9 s = r2 ^ 2,10 0 ^ 2, 37 0 (152) (15,)
^33,1 '0 ^33,8 0 ^33,9 ss ^33 之 33,10 0 ^33,37 _ 0 .· •(15λ)^ 33,1 '0 ^ 33,8 0 ^ 33,9 ss ^ 33 of 33,10 0 ^ 33,37 _ 0. · (15λ)
由上述之式(15ι)、(152)........(15J也可知,From the above formulas (15ι), (152) ..... (15J also knows that
Pl’、P2’........ρ:係能看作其各評價點(量測點/ 克多項式第9項以外之係數全部為零,能看作々$ 數為rj(j=i〜33)之37行】列之列矩陣⑼向量^弟9 J| 因此’若用矩陣r來表示此時之各調整里參數之調 67 的話,則使用前述之矩陣ο, Q,= 0 · P, )之顯係成立 ··· · · · ( 1 /λ \ 在上式(】6)t,ρ,係 — (从表不之列矩陣 ADJ1 ADJ2 Ρ1 •(17) ADJm 在下-步驟122巾,主控制裝 解上式(16),求出矩係用取小平方法來 山祀丨早P (由各調整量所 次式(1 8)之運算。 冓成)。即,進行 P,= (〇T · 0)1 · 〇τ ^ ......(18、 在下一步驟124中,士 # 之Ρ,,即,山巾主控制裝置50係根據上述所算出 i异出調整量(ADJ1〜細5、ADJ19),與前述 同樣,控制可動透鏡13 A . DT ^ 1 5專之调整各部,調整投影光 干1'、、、 後,結束一連串之處理。又,關於晶圓之位 =式之調整量Α_〜調整i Amu,目使用在後述 :幻田曝光%之晶圓台WST之位置控制,故事先記憶在 鳩或_置44中。藉此,投影光學系統PL之視野 内=33個評價點之波面像差,具體而言,查淫克多項式 之第9項係數僅rj份變動之投影光學系統pL之調整完成 0 其結果,使用調整完成之投影光學系統PL·,將縱線(V 線)圖案與検線(H線)圖案混在一起之標線片r上之電路圖 68 200400540 案轉印在晶圓w上,藉此,為了使這些縱線(v線)圖案與 橫線(H線)圖案像之線寬差(縱橫線之線寬差)趨近設計值, 例如’加以修正以使趨近零。 此處係針對調整上述之投影光學系統PL,藉此能修正 縱橫線之線寬差之理由加以詳述。 弟ό圖之下段(弟6D圖〜弟6F圖)係表示,當高階像 散像差項之查涅克多項式之第12項係數ζ12=+20ηιλ時, 根據低階球面像差項之查涅克多項式之第9項係數&之變 化之光瞳面内之波面變化之情況(模擬結果)。其中,第 圖係表示Z9=—20rn λ之情形,第6E圖係表示z9 = 〇m又之 情形,第6F圖係表示Z9== + 2〇m又之情形。Pl ', P2' ........ ρ: can be regarded as their evaluation points (measurement points / gram polynomial coefficients other than the ninth term are all zero, can be regarded as 々 $ number is rj (j = i ~ 33) of 37 rows] column matrix matrix ⑼ vector ^ brother 9 J | Therefore, 'If the matrix r is used to represent the key 67 of the parameters in each adjustment at this time, use the aforementioned matrix ο, Q, = The display system of 0 · P,) is established ... · · · · · (1 / λ \ in the above formula () 6) t, ρ, system — (from the matrix of the table ADJ1 ADJ2 ρ1 • (17) ADJm is below- In step 122, the main control device solves the above formula (16), finds the moment system and uses the Xiaoping method to sacrifice early P (the operation of the formula (18) by each adjustment amount. 冓 成). That is, perform P, = (〇T · 0) 1 · 〇τ ^ ... (18. In the next step 124, the P of the person #, that is, the main control device 50 of the mountain towel is calculated according to the above. After adjusting the adjustment amount (ADJ1 ~ Fine 5, ADJ19), as described above, control the movable lens 13 A. DT ^ 1 5 to adjust each part specifically, adjust the projection light stem 1 ',, and, and end a series of processing. Also, about Wafer position = type adjustment amount Α_ ~ adjust i Amu, use Later description: The position control of wafer stage WST of the magical exposure%, the story is first memorized in the dove or _ set 44. By this, within the field of view of the projection optical system PL = wavefront aberration of 33 evaluation points, specifically, The ninth term coefficient of the Chase polynomial is adjusted only by the projection optical system pL with 0 changes. As a result, using the adjusted projection optical system PL ·, the vertical line (V line) pattern and the ray line (H line) are adjusted. The circuit diagram 68 on the reticle r with the patterns mixed is transferred to the wafer w. Therefore, in order to make the vertical line (v line) pattern and horizontal line (H line) pattern image line width difference (vertical and horizontal) The line width difference of the lines is approaching the design value, for example, 'corrected so as to approach zero. Here is a detailed explanation of the reason why the above-mentioned projection optical system PL can be adjusted to correct the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines. The lower part of the figure (Figure 6D to Figure 6F) indicates that when the coefficient of the 12th term of the Chagneck polynomial of the high-order astigmatic aberration term is ζ12 = + 20ηιλ, according to the Chagnek of the low-order spherical aberration term Wavefront change in the pupil plane of the ninth term coefficient & of the polynomial Where (simulation results). Wherein, based on FIG Z9 = -20rn λ represents the case, based on FIG. 6E showing z9 = 〇m and the case, based on FIG. 6F showing Z9 == + 2〇m and the case.
1 2項成份不是零時,若使第9項1 If the 2nd component is not zero, if you make the 9th item
69 200400540 此處’標線片上之縱線(v線)圖案在橫方向具有空間 頻率成份’故從縱線(v線)圖案,在左右方向產生繞射光 ’橫線(H線)圖案在縱方向具有空間頻率成份,故從橫線 (H線)圖案’在上下方向產生繞射光。 因此,如上述,當第9項與第12項之符號相等時(第 6F圖之情形)’在相位變化大之左右方向,產生繞射光之 縱線圖案像之對比變低,線寬變細。相對地,在相位變化 扒之上下方向,產生繞射光之橫線圖案像之對比幾乎不降69 200400540 Here, 'the vertical line (v-line) pattern on the reticle has spatial frequency components in the horizontal direction', so from the vertical line (v-line) pattern, diffraction light is generated in the left and right directions' the horizontal line (H-line) pattern is in the vertical direction The direction has a spatial frequency component, so diffracted light is generated from the horizontal line (H line) pattern 'in the up-down direction. Therefore, as described above, when the signs of the 9th item and the 12th item are equal (in the case of FIG. 6F), in the left and right directions where the phase change is large, the contrast of the vertical line pattern image that produces the diffracted light becomes lower, and the line width becomes thinner. . In contrast, in the phase change, the contrast of the horizontal line pattern image of the diffracted light is almost unchanged.
低,故線寬係大致與設計值相同。其結果,縱橫線之線寬 差成為負值。Low, so the line width is about the same as the design value. As a result, the line width difference between the vertical and horizontal lines becomes a negative value.
與上述相反,當第12項之符號為正時,若第9項之4 號為負的話,則光瞳之左右第12項之相位變化為正,^ 第9項之相位變化為負,故相互減弱,在光瞳之上下,^ 員之相位變化與第9項之相位變化都向負增強,這種七 形例如,成為第6D圖所示之光瞳面内之波面分布。$ ::形,在相位變化大之上下方向,產生繞射光之橫線圈 右^對比變低,線寬變細。相對地,在相位變化小之j 方向,產生繞射光之縱線圖案像之對比幾乎不 敌 線寬係大致盥科古+伯η 甘α 正值 /、°又。值相同。八、、、σ果,縱橫線之線寬差成為 瞳之^上所述可知,當第9項與第12項都不是零時,光 下方向與左右方向之波面錯亂方式係根據第9項與 值之壯1之符號之正負而異,著眼在該點,在^第項 “下’調整較易調整之第9項(低階球面像差成份) 70 200400540 ’藉此’能調整縱橫線之線寬差。 上述之第9項㈧之階數為4階〇θ成份)與第12項(々 之階數為4階之2Θ成份(cos20成份))之相位變化之方向 差係降低P之階數,若考慮第4項以之階數為2請成 份之散焦項:係數Z4)與第5項〇之階數為2階之^成 份(⑽2Θ成份)之低階像散像差工員:絲a)相關之比較的 活,則易於理解。 主*第5項之符號為正時’例如,如第π圖所示,光 瞳左右方向之相位為正,上下方向之相位為負。另一方面 ,*第4項之符號為正時,例如’如第%圖所示,光瞳 外周緣部之相位為正’當第4項之符號為負時,例如,如 第7A圖所示,光瞳外周緣部之相位為負。因此,當第5 項與第4項之符號係相等之第 寸及弟7F圖般之情形,光曈左右 方向之相位變化大,上下方向 Π之相位嫒化小。相反地,當 第5項與第4項之符號俏;^ }榮 # ^ 仃观係不相專之第7D圖般之情形,光 目里左右:向之相位變化小,上下方向之相位變化大。 θ 田第5員不疋零時,在縱線圖案與橫線圖案, 隶佳t焦位置係根據該係數ζ夕伯 儿 ?数Z5之值而異,故若使第4項變 化的話,則縱線(V線)圖案盥护綠m 、 祸線(Η線)圖案像之線寬差( 線覓差),會根據散焦(即,第 、ί弟4項之變化)而產生。即,杏 線寬因散焦而變化時,得如筮 田 如喊 係如弟8圖之CD-聚焦線圖所示, 在第4項不是零之聚焦位置, 1 對應弟5項之縱線圖案盥橫 線圖案之最佳聚焦位置之#,方A , A 、 產生縱線圖案像(V)與橫線圖 案像(H)之線寬差。這是一般 所見之2 Θ成份之像散像差存 71 200400540 在時之〇 0成份變化(散焦),對縱線圖案像與橫線圖案像 · 線寬之影響之差。由此可知,當低階之像散像差成份第5 項不是零時,調整表示散焦之第4項,能縮小縱線圖案像 與橫線圖案像之線寬差。 第9圖係表示使用波長為248 3nm之ΚΓρ雷射來作為 光源’照明為σ=0.75之2/3環帶照明條件、投影光學系統 PL之數值孔徑(NAHM之情形,轉印前述之量測用標線 片RT上之圖案所得到之光阻像之線寬量測結果之縱橫線之 線寬差之實驗結果之一例。又,第1〇圖係更詳細表示第9 · 圖之Z12=4〇mA、2()mA、〇mA之部份(上3段之部份),第 η圖係更詳細表示第9圖之Zi2=—2〇mA、—4〇m又之部 份(下2段之部份)。在第圖、第η圖中,各等高線圖 之&軸係表示第4項之係數24’縱軸係表示第5項之係數 從這些說明可知,第9圖係表示針對分別在±40m之 車巳圍内’且肖20„U步驟使第9項係數&與第12項係數 "12生之值艾化之各z9、Zi2之組合,&與&分別變化時之 之1㈣之關係圖。·9圖中之各領域内所附之陰 衫線專係表不第 9圖少α - 图之下攔所不之縱橫線之線寬 =值為^領域係表示縱線(V線)圖案像之線線Η 線寬粗’線寬差值為負之領域係表示縱線(V 線)圖案像之線寬較橫線(Η線)圖案像之線寬細。 第:2Α圖係表示取出第9圖之左上所示之 9———伽又之等高線圖,第⑶圖係表示對應第12Α 72 200400540 之C-C線之CD-聚焦線圖。又,第12B圖係表示取出第 10圖之上奴中央所不之Zi2=4〇m;l、Z9=〇m又之等高線圖 。第12D圖係表示對應第12B 、線之⑶-聚焦線 圖。從這些圖可知,第9圖之各等高線圖係表示在Zi2、A 之某種、、且口條件下,根據散焦項(係數Z4)與低階像散像差 項(係數Z5)之變化,如何變化v線圖案像與H線圖案像之 線寬差(以下,都稱為「VH差」)之圖。 當z12值為零時(從第9圖中之上,與第3段並排之$In contrast to the above, when the sign of item 12 is positive, if the number 4 of item 9 is negative, the phase change of the 12th item from the left and right of the pupil is positive, and the phase change of the 9th item is negative, so Weakening each other, the phase change of the ^ member and the phase change of the ninth term increase negatively above and above the pupil. This sigmoid, for example, becomes the wavefront distribution in the pupil plane shown in FIG. 6D. $ :: shape, the horizontal coil of diffracted light is generated in the up and down direction of the phase change. The right ^ contrast becomes lower and the line width becomes thinner. In contrast, in the j direction with a small phase change, the contrast of the vertical line pattern image that produces the diffracted light is almost inferior to the line width, which is roughly the positive value of Koko + Bo η and α. The values are the same. Eight ,, σ, the difference between the width of the vertical and horizontal lines becomes the pupil ^ As mentioned above, when the 9th and 12th terms are not zero, the wavefront disorder of the light direction and the left and right direction is based on the 9th item The sign differs from the sign of the value of 1. The focus is on this point, and the 9th item (low-order spherical aberration component) which is easier to adjust under the ^ item "70" 200400540 'This can adjust the vertical and horizontal lines The line width difference. The difference in direction between the phase changes of the ninth term ㈧ above is the 4th order θθ component and the 12th term (the order of 々 is the 4th order 2Θ component (cos20 component)) is reduced by P If the order of the 4th term is taken into account, the defocus term of the component is 2: coefficient Z4) and the 5th term is 0. The low-order astigmatic aberration of the 2nd order ^ component (⑽2Θ component) Worker: Silk a) Relative comparison work, it is easy to understand. The sign of the main item * is positive. For example, as shown in Figure π, the phase in the left and right direction of the pupil is positive, and the phase in the up and down direction is negative. On the other hand, * the sign of the 4th term is positive, for example, 'as shown in the% chart, the phase of the pupil peripheral edge is positive' when the sign of the 4th term is negative For example, as shown in Figure 7A, the phase of the pupil's outer peripheral edge is negative. Therefore, when the signs of the 5th and 4th terms are equal to the size of the inch and the figure 7F, the light in the left and right directions The phase change is large, and the phase of the up and down direction Π is small. On the contrary, when the symbols of the 5th and 4th items are pretty; ^ 荣 # ^ 仃 观 系 is not the same as the 7D picture-like situation, in the eyes Left and right: The phase change is small, and the phase change in the up and down direction is large. Θ When the fifth member of the field is not zero, the vertical focus and vertical line patterns are based on the coefficient z5. The value varies, so if the fourth item is changed, the difference in line width (line-finding difference) of the vertical line (V line) pattern toilet green m and the line of evil (line line) pattern image will be based on the defocus ( That is, the change of item 4 and item 4) is generated. That is, when the line width of apricots changes due to defocus, it must be as shown in the CD-focus line diagram of Figure 8 as shown in Figure 8. Focus position other than zero, 1 corresponds to # 5 of the best focus position of the vertical line pattern and horizontal line pattern of the 5th item, square A, A, produces a vertical line pattern image (V) and a horizontal line graph The difference in line width of image (H). This is the astigmatism aberration of 2 Θ components that are generally seen. 71 200400540 The component change (defocus) at time 〇0. For vertical line pattern image and horizontal line pattern image · Line width It can be seen that when the fifth term of the astigmatism aberration component of the lower order is not zero, adjusting the fourth term indicating defocus can reduce the line width difference between the vertical line pattern image and the horizontal line pattern image. Figure 9 shows the use of a KΓρ laser with a wavelength of 248 3nm as the light source. Illumination is 2/3 of the ring illumination condition with σ = 0.75, and the numerical aperture of the projection optical system PL (in the case of NAHM, transfer the aforementioned measurement) An example of the experimental result of the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines of the photoresist image line width measurement result obtained by using the pattern on the reticle RT. Figure 10 shows the part of Figure 9 in more detail: Z12 = 40 mA, 2 () mA, and 0 mA (part of the previous 3 paragraphs), and Figure η shows the details in Figure 9 The part of Zi2 = -20mA, -40m (the part of the next 2 paragraphs). In the graphs and η graphs, the & axis system of each contour graph indicates the coefficient of the fourth term. 24 'The vertical axis system indicates the coefficient of the fifth term. From these descriptions, it can be seen that the 9th graph indicates Inside the car's perimeter and step 20 "U steps make the combination of the 9th coefficient & the 12th coefficient " 12-year value of each z9, Zi2 ai, and & and & respectively change 1㈣ The relationship diagram. · The shirt line attached to each area in the 9 figure is specifically shown in Figure 9 less α-the line width of the vertical and horizontal lines below the figure = the value ^ indicates the vertical line ( V line) The line of the pattern image Η The line width is thick. The area where the line width difference is negative indicates that the line width of the vertical line (V line) pattern image is thinner than the line width of the horizontal line (Η line) pattern image. Figure 2A shows the 9 --- Gaiyou contour map shown in the upper left of Figure 9; Figure ⑶ shows the CD-focus map corresponding to CC line 12A 72 200400540. Also, Figure 12B shows Take out the contour map of Zi2 = 4〇m; l, Z9 = 〇m, which is not in the middle of the slave on the top of Figure 10. Figure 12D shows the CG-focus line map corresponding to 12B and line. From these figures, we can know The contour maps in Figure 9 show how to change the v-line according to the changes in the defocus term (coefficient Z4) and the low-order astigmatic aberration term (coefficient Z5) under some conditions of Zi2 and A. A diagram showing the difference in line width between the pattern image and the H-line pattern image (hereinafter, both are referred to as "VH difference"). When the value of z12 is zero (from above in Figure 9 and $ 3 side by side with paragraph 3)
個等高線圖),z9之值因各圖而異,但如第1〇圖之下段之 各圖所示,無論在哪個圖哪個聚焦位置,若乙之值為零的 話,則不產生VH差。Contour map), the value of z9 varies from map to map, but as shown in the maps in the lower section of Figure 10, no matter which focus position is in which map, if the value of B is zero, no VH difference will occur.
相對地,當Zu值不是零時,例如,# Zi2 = + 4〇m又時 ,從第10圖中之上段之各圖可知,s z5 = 〇的話,則會起 因於Z,2而產生V線圖案與H線圖案之最佳聚焦差,線寬 之VH差雖因Z4之值而變化,但此時,各Z4之VH差之值 會因Z9之大小而變化。為了更明確瞭解該vh差值&之 影響性,提供相當於高階像散像差項之係 —之25,用低階像散像差項(係數25),;修正高階像 散像差項之第12項之V線圖案與Η線圖案之最佳聚焦差 ,係使沒有線寬差之聚焦影響性之情形。 線寬之VH差係受心值之影響,當A】值為正時,ν 線圖案像之線寬係較Η線圖案之線寬細,相反地,當 值為負時,V線圖案像之線寬係車交Η線圖案之線寬粗,可 知能證明先前使用第6圖所說明之内容。 73 200400540 發明者等所進行之實驗結果,係用較佳聚焦差(在照明 ° 〇·4之通常照明條件下,線寬〇·72 /z m線與間隙圖案 (L/S圖案)與線寬l4#mL/s圖案之較佳聚焦位置之差), 將球面像差項Z9之大小,從—〇18 # m變更為—〇 〇2 # ηι ’藉此確認能將線寬之VH差從27nm減低到7〜8nm。 從以上之說明可證明,如前述,在投影光學系統視野 内之各評價點,根據縱橫線之線寬差(VH差)與查涅克 員式之第1 2項係數z 12之值(大小),進行既定之運算, π出第9項係數&變化量之目標值qq........ Γη(η==33),根據所算出之第9項係數Z9變化量之目標值, 進行别述投影光學系統之調整,藉此能調整縱橫線之線寬 差。 但是,本實施形態之曝光裝置100,係在製造半導體 π件時,製造元件用之標線片R係承載在標線片台RST上 j後進行標線片調準及所謂之基線量測、及 EGA(Enhanced Global alignment ••增強型全晶圓調準)等晶 圓量測等準備作業。 又關於上述之標線片調準及基線量測等準備作業, 例如’詳細揭示在日本特開平7_176彻號公報及對應該公 ,之美國專利第5,646,413號等,又,其次,關於ega, \揭不在日本特開昭6 1 -44429號公報及對應該公報之美 國專利第4,78M17號#,引用±述各公報及對應這此公 報之上述美國專利中之揭示’當作本說明書所記載之一部 74 200400540 然後’根據晶圓調準結果 。又,因曝光時之動㈣盘广步進“方式之曝光 針對“與—般之掃描曝光裝置相同,故 _係在上述步進掃描方:二’本貫施形態之曝光裝置 圖之流程圖所示之調整方、“ 便用猎由别述弟4In contrast, when the Zu value is not zero, for example, # Zi2 = + 4〇m, and from the upper graphs in Figure 10, it can be seen that if s z5 = 〇, V will be caused by Z, 2. The optimal focus difference between the line pattern and the H line pattern. Although the VH difference of the line width varies due to the value of Z4, at this time, the value of the VH difference of each Z4 varies due to the size of Z9. In order to understand the influence of the vh difference & clearly, a system equivalent to the high-order astigmatic aberration term—25 is provided. The low-order astigmatic aberration term (coefficient 25) is used to correct the high-order astigmatic aberration term. The optimal focus difference between the V-line pattern and the stern line pattern of item 12 is the case where there is no focus effect of the line width difference. The VH difference of the line width is affected by the heart value. When the value of A] is positive, the line width of the ν line pattern image is thinner than that of the Η line pattern. Conversely, when the value is negative, the V line pattern image is The line width is the thick line width of the car crossing line pattern, and it can be seen that it can prove the content explained previously using FIG. 6. 73 200400540 The results of experiments conducted by the inventors used better focus difference (under normal lighting conditions of illumination ° 0.4, line width 0.72 / zm line and gap pattern (L / S pattern) and line width l4 # mL / s pattern, the difference between the better focus positions), change the size of the spherical aberration term Z9 from —〇18 # m to —〇〇2 # ηι 'to confirm that the VH difference of the line width can be changed from 27nm is reduced to 7 ~ 8nm. From the above explanation, it can be proved that, as mentioned above, the value (size of each evaluation point in the field of view of the projection optical system according to the line width difference (VH difference) of the vertical and horizontal lines and the 12th term coefficient of the Zernike member formula (z12) ), Perform a predetermined operation, and π output the target value of the ninth term coefficient & the amount of change qq ........ Γη (η == 33), and according to the calculated target of the ninth term coefficient of change Z9 Value, to adjust the projection optical system, so that the line width difference between the vertical and horizontal lines can be adjusted. However, in the exposure device 100 of this embodiment, when manufacturing a semiconductor π component, the reticle R for manufacturing a component is carried on the reticle table RST, and then the reticle is adjusted and the so-called baseline measurement, Preparations such as wafer measurement such as EGA (Enhanced Global alignment) Regarding the above-mentioned preparations of the reticle alignment and baseline measurement, for example, 'Details are disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7_176 and corresponding publication, US Patent No. 5,646,413, etc., and secondly, regarding ega, \ It is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6 1-44429 and the corresponding U.S. Patent No. 4,78M17 #. The disclosures in each of the publications and the aforementioned U.S. patents corresponding to this publication are referred to as described in this specification. One part 74 200400540 and then 'based on wafer alignment results. In addition, because the exposure during the exposure process is the same as that of the normal scanning exposure device, so it is the flowchart of the exposure device diagram in the above-mentioned step scanning method: the second embodiment. The adjustment method shown, "Then use hunting by Besshudi 4
,v〜 整方法來進行調整之投影光學系統PL 式係根據所算出之句整Α Γ 1A之^ K W之位置及方 此,本實Μ Ϊ 6〜細8來進行控制。藉 本貫㈣悲係在標線片R所形成之電 圖案像與橫線圖案像之飧宫至^ ,、中之,,,R線 減低之狀態下’這些像(潛像 )係形成在日日囫上之之各照射領域。The projection optical system PL that is adjusted by the method of v ~ is adjusted according to the calculated position and method of ^ K W of A Γ 1A, and this control is performed by M Ϊ 6 ~ 8. By virtue of the fact that the electrical pattern image and horizontal line pattern image formed by the reticle R are from the palace to ^,,,,,,,, and R lines are reduced, these images (latent images) are formed Every irradiation field on the sun.
由以上之說明可知,本實施形態之調整部係由可動透 鏡13!〜135、晶圓A WST、光源Η所構成,可動透鏡 二ΘΥ)方向之位置(或其變 I且W 之照明光之波長偏移量成為調整量 、’且’错由上述各調整部、驅動可 成像性能之修正控制器48、驅動晶圓台WST二= 動部(未圖示)’來構成像形成狀態調整裝置。又,夢由口主 7裝置50來構成控制該像形成狀態調整裝置之㈣裝 。但疋,像形成狀態調整裝置之構成係 :明者,::如:就調整部而言,也可只包含可動透:: 5 k係因為即使在這種情形也能調整投影光學系統之 成像性能(各像差)之故。 又,本實施形態係藉由主控制裝置50(算出拍攝晶圓 上所形成之量測用圖案之光阻像之調準系、统ALG,與根據 75 200400540 忒凋準系統ALG之攝影信號,量測用圖案所包含之縱線圖 · 案與橫線圖案之光阻像之線寬),來構成線寬量測裝置。又 就線寬$測裝置而言,例如,也可使用設置在曝光裝置 100之外部之專用量測裝置(SEM等)。 又’在以上之說明中,投影光學系統PL之調整等之 IV、所進行之波面像差之量測係使用波面像差量測裝置川, 根據透過針孔及投影光學系統PL所形成之空間像來進行 者’但不限於此’例如,使用美國專利帛5,978,〇85號等 斤揭示之特殊構^之量測用遮光罩,依序透過個別所設置 修 、’十孔及投〜光子系統’將該遮光罩上之複數個量測用之 各圖案曬印在基板上’並且,也可不透過聚光透鏡及針孔 而透過投影光學系统,將該遮光罩上之基準圖案曬印在 土板上對各曬印之結果所得到之複數個量測用圖案之光 阻像之各基準圖案之光阻像,量測位置偏移,藉由既定之 運算,算出波面像差。 如以上詳細之說明,若依本實施形態之投影光學系統 PL之調整方法的話,則調整投影光H统PL,來控制受 _ 投影光學系統PL之不易調整之高階像散像差(第12項)之 〜曰所起因而產生之前述縱橫線之線差寬,來控制容易調 整之低階球面像差(第9項)。因此,能自由且確實進行習 知困難之縱線圖案像與橫線圖案像之線寬差之控制。 ▲又二若依本實施形態之曝光裝£ ι〇〇及該曝光方法的 舌則藉由波面像差!測裝置8〇能量測投影光學系'统PL H面ϋ 又’ 1測用標線片&之量測用圖案係透過投 76 200400540 統PL,轉印在晶…,顯影後將該晶圓形成 用之置測用圖案之光阻像係藉由主控制裝置50,使 關案:?^來攝影’根據該攝影信號’分別算出量夠 、、匕3之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之光阻像之線寬。From the above description, it can be seen that the adjusting part of this embodiment is composed of movable lenses 13! To 135, wafer A WST, and light source Η, and the position of the movable lens 2 Θ 方向 (or its illumination light I and W changes I and W). The amount of wavelength shift becomes the adjustment amount, and the above-mentioned adjustment section, the correction controller 48 that drives the imageable performance, and the driving stage WST 2 = the moving section (not shown) constitute the image formation state adjustment device. The dream is constituted by the master device 7 device 50 to control the image formation state adjustment device. However, the structure of the image formation state adjustment device is: Ming Ming, :: For example, as far as the adjustment part is concerned, Contains only movable: 5 k because the imaging performance (variable aberrations) of the projection optical system can be adjusted even in this case. In addition, the present embodiment uses the main control device 50 (calculates on the imaging wafer) The alignment system and system ALG of the photoresist image of the measurement pattern formed and the photographic signal according to 75 200400540 ALG system ALG, the vertical pattern, pattern, and horizontal pattern light included in the measurement pattern Line width of blocking image) to form a line width measuring device As for the line width measurement device, for example, a dedicated measurement device (SEM, etc.) provided outside the exposure device 100 may be used. Also, in the above description, IV, The measurement of the wavefront aberration is performed using a wavefront aberration measuring device Kawasaki based on a space image formed through a pinhole and a projection optical system PL, but is not limited thereto. For example, US Patent No. 5,978, 〇85 The measuring hood with a special structure revealed by the catties, etc., is sequentially printed through a set of repairs, 'ten holes and projection ~ optical subsystem', each pattern on the hood is printed for each measurement On the substrate, and through the projection optical system without transmitting the condenser lens and pinhole, the reference pattern on the hood can be printed on the soil plate, and multiple measurement patterns can be obtained as a result of each printing. The photoresist image of each reference pattern of the photoresist image is used to measure the position shift and calculate the wavefront aberration by a predetermined calculation. As described above in detail, if the method of adjusting the projection optical system PL according to this embodiment is used, ,then Adjust the projection light H system PL to control the high-order astigmatic aberration (item 12) of the _ projection optical system PL, which is not easy to adjust. The width of the aforementioned vertical and horizontal lines is generated to control the easy adjustment. Low-order spherical aberration (item 9). Therefore, it is possible to freely and surely control the line width difference between the vertical line pattern image and the horizontal line pattern image, which is difficult to learn. ▲ And if the exposure equipment according to this embodiment is used, ι〇〇 and the exposure method of the tongue by wavefront aberration! Measuring device 80 energy measurement projection optical system 'system PL H surface ϋ' '1 measurement reticle & measurement pattern is through projection 76 200400540 System PL, transferred to the crystal ... After development, the photoresist image of the pattern for measuring the wafer formation is developed by the main control device 50 to close the case: ^ Let's take a picture. 'Calculate the line width of the photoresist image of the vertical line pattern and horizontal line pattern with a sufficient amount, and the horizontal line pattern based on the shooting signal.
主技制裝置50,當展開藉由波面像差量測 所量測之,面像差之查淫克多項式之…之高階像: 像差項U 1 t學特性)不是零時,係根據該第12項(係數 Zl2)之值、與上述所量測之縱線圖案像之線寬之第i 與橫線圖案像之線寬之第2線寬之差(線寬差),使用前: 之像形成狀態調整裝置’將因與帛12項之相互作用而使 上述線寬差受影響之查涅克多項式之帛9項之低階球面像 差項(第2光學特性)之大小加以控制。即,使用像形成狀 態調整裝置來控制容易調整之低階球面像差之大小,藉此 能控制因不易調整之高階像散像差之存在而起因所產生之 前述線寬差。 並且,用照明光EL來照明標線片R之電路圖案,透 過調整後之投影光學系統PL,將該電路圖案轉印在晶圓 W上。藉此,能實現有效減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印 像彼此之線寬差。 又,在上述實施形態中,雖已針對第1光學特性係展 開波面像差之查涅克多項式第12項(高階像散像差項)之情 形,及第2光學特性係查涅克多項式第9項(低階球面像差 項)之情形加以說明,但本發明不限定在此者。例如,就第 1光學特性而言,也可量測與上述第12項(p之階數為4 77 200400540 階之cos2 0成份)相同之p之階數兔 丨白数為4階之2Θ成份(sin2g 成份)之第13項。這種情形,就第 凡弟2先學特性而言,仍能 使用與上述實施形態相同之第9 Jg 不3項。由於第9項與第13 項之相互作用,在標線片上,斟铪、a 對則述之縱線(V線)、橫線 (H線」,使分別用45。&又方向之第i斜線圖案像與與此 線正父之帛2斜線圖案像之線寬差受到影響。因此,與上 述實施形態同樣,當查涅克多項式 、 只A之弟13項不是零時,The main technical device 50 develops a high-order image of the surface aberration check polynomial of ... measured by wavefront aberration measurement: when the aberration term U 1 is not equal to zero, it is based on the The value of item 12 (factor Zl2) and the difference (line width difference) between the i-th line width of the vertical line pattern image and the second line width of the horizontal line pattern image measured above (line width difference), before use: The image formation state adjusting device 'controls the magnitude of the low-order spherical aberration term (second optical characteristic) of the 帛 9 term of the Zernike polynomial which affects the line width difference due to the interaction with the 帛 12 term. . That is, the image formation state adjustment device is used to control the magnitude of the low-order spherical aberration that is easy to adjust, thereby controlling the aforementioned line width difference caused by the existence of the high-order astigmatic aberration that is not easy to adjust. Furthermore, the circuit pattern of the reticle R is illuminated with the illumination light EL, and the circuit pattern is transferred onto the wafer W through the adjusted projection optical system PL. This makes it possible to effectively reduce the line width difference between the transferred images of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the case where the 12th term of the Zernike polynomial (high-order astigmatic aberration term) of the wavefront aberration is developed for the first optical characteristic system, and the Zernike polynomial term of the second optical characteristic system is expanded. The case of 9 terms (low-order spherical aberration terms) will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in terms of the first optical characteristic, it is also possible to measure the order of rabbit p which is the same as the item 12 above (the order of p is a cos2 0 component of the order 4 77 200400540). The white number is a 2Θ component of the fourth order. (Sin2g ingredient) Item 13. In this case, as far as the first learning characteristics of Fandidi 2 are concerned, it is still possible to use the same 9th Jg and 3 items as the above embodiment. Due to the interaction between item 9 and item 13, on the reticle, consider the vertical line (V line) and horizontal line (H line) described by a pair, so use 45. & The line width difference between the oblique line pattern image i and the oblique line pattern image of the sire 2 of this line's father is affected. Therefore, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the 13 terms of the Chaney polynomial and only the brother of A are not zero,
根據該第U項(係數Zl3)之值、與所量測之第^線圖宰 像之線寬之第匕線寬之第2斜線圖案像之線寬之第2線寬 之差(線寬差),使用前述之像形成狀態調整裝置來控制查 淫克多項式之帛9項之低階球面像差項之大小,藉此能控 制前述之線寬差。According to the value of the U term (coefficient Zl3), the difference between the line width and the second line width of the measured line width of the ^ line graph, the second line width of the slash pattern image, and the second line width (line width Difference), using the aforementioned image formation state adjusting device to control the magnitude of the low-order spherical aberration term of the 9th term of the Chase polynomial, thereby controlling the aforementioned line width difference.
其他’也可把帛1光學特性當作展開波面像差之查淫 克多項式之上述第12項、第13項以外ο之階數為m(m -4)之2階旋轉對稱成份,把第2光學特性當作與第9項 乂外之七述2階旋轉對稱成份同一階數之旋轉對稱成份。 足樣-來’當第1光學特性之大小不是零時,係根據該第 1光予特f生之大小與量測所正交之2軸方向之線圖案彼此 像之線寬差,為了控制帛2光學特性,調整投影光學系統 PL,推測藉此能得到與上述實施形態同等之效果者。 並且’就使前述之縱橫線之線差寬(νίί差)受影響之第 1光子特性之第2光學特性之組合而言,除了上述所說明 之查涅克多項式之第9項與第12項之組合外,也有第6 項(係數Z6)與第18項(係數ZJ、第13項(係數Zi3)與第 78 200400540 18項(係數Z18)、第12項(係數zi2)與第17項(係數Z17)等 之組合。 發明者等’因能有效判斷展開波面像差之查涅克多項 式項(查埋克項)之組合是否成為VH差之原因,故進行用 來具體發現造成VH差原因之組合模擬。 第13圖係用圖表來表示在光源為ArF準分子雷射(波 長為193nm)、投影光學系統pL之數值孔徑(na) = 〇68、照 明σ -0.85、2/3環帶照明條件下,用晶圓上換算值將線寬 140nm(包含遮光罩偏差·· +4〇疆)之孤立線(2 #㈤間矩)當作籲 祆線片圖案,使用透過率為6%之半色調型之移相遮光罩( 標線片),在晶圓上,將孤立線之線寬加工成1〇〇nm時之 像差間之父又項之計算結果。在該第圖中,Zi(i=4〜 20)係表示查涅克項第丨項。 在該第13圖中,斜境界線之右上側係各像差(查涅克 項)之父又項對橫線之大小,左下側係各像差(查涅克項)之 父叉項對縱線之大小。從該第13圖之表可知,第9項(Z9) 與第12項(Z12)之組合之交又項在橫線為759,在縱線為 _ 一 759,符號正好相反。 ’、他第6項(Z6)與第18項(Z18)、第13項(Z13)與第 18項(Z18) '第12項(Z12)與第17項⑻?)等之組合,縱橫 線之交又項符號也相反,成為VH差之原目。 、 、、就第1光學特性與第2光學特性之組合而言,雖考慮 上述各種查/圼克項彼此間之組合’但不限於此,也可把第 1光學特性當作像散像差,把第2光學特性當作球面像差 79 200400540 。這樣-來’若考慮像散像差與球面像差之相互作用使縱 線圖案像與橫線圖案像之線寬差受影響的話,則當投影光 學系統之光學特性之量測結果存在像散像差時,係=該 像散像差之大小與所量測之正交2軸方向之線圖案彼此像 之線寬差,為了控制球面像差,調整投影光學系統,藉 此能控制線寬差。 又,若考慮這種情形的話則能明瞭,但投影光學系統 PL之光學特性量測裝置係不限定在波面像差量測裝置,也 可是用來量測投影光學系統pL之球面像差、像散像差等 所謂之賽德咖㈣之5像差之裝置。例如,就該|置而言 ,有所謂之空間像量測器等,其係在晶圓台WST上,形 成隙縫狀或矩形狀之開口圖案,對藉由投影光學系統π 所形成之既定之量測用圖案之空間像,來掃描該開口圖案 ’用光電元件來檢測透過開口圖案之光。 又,在上述實施形態中,投影光學系統PL·之波面像 差係使用波面像差測定器8〇來直接量測者,但不限於此 ,因第12項(係數zy係高階像散像差項,故例如,也可 分別求出週期方向相異之複數種之L/s圖案(或方向相異之 η線圖案)之較佳聚焦位置,該結果所得到之像散像差係 用最小平方法等’纟算出作叉定低階像散像差項(係數乙)鱼 高階缝像差項(係數Ζΐ2)之線性結合之計算式之各未丄係 數藉此來求出第12項(係數Ζιζ)之近似值。上述週期方 向之相異複數種之L/s w案之較佳聚焦位置之求出係—面 變更晶圓光轴方向之位置,一面用SEM等來量測光阻像( 80 200400540 〃係形成在將上述圖案曬印在該晶圓上之結果所得到之曰 圓上之各照射領域),也可使用前述之空間像量測器,―: 變更該空間像量測器光轴方向之位置,-面進行上述圖Γ 之空間像:測,根據該空間像之量測結果來求出。木 二,:用與上述實施形態同樣之構成來構成線寬量測 $置日,’不限於光阻像,也可量測形成在晶圓上之前述縱 線圖案與橫線圖案之潛像或敍刻像之線寬。或也可m 述空間像量測裝置來構成線寬量測裝置。這種情形,曰例: ,在像面上形成縱線圖案與橫線圖案之m像 像量測裝置來量測該空間像之線寬。亦即,同時行像:: 成與線寬之量測。 之^ $ 又,在上述實施形態中,為了簡化說明,係針 =寬之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之像之線寬差大致為零之 :寬差之控制時來加以說明’但本發明之投影光 5周整方法等,不限於此,若是正交2軸方向之圖案:、 的話’則與線寬之情況無關(即使該線寬,:二:間 些像彼此之線寬差之控制。就線寬差之控制而言 正確趨近設計上之線寬差之圖案像之線寬差。 工1 又’上述實施形態’用本體(投影光學系統搭载在 衣之狀態)來進行投影光學系統之調整,但例如,* 一 裝置(特別係投影光學系統)之製程等中,也可进曝光 裝置前,用單體來調整投影光學系統。 °在曝光 但是,產生正交2車由方向之線圖案像彼此 一 主因係不限於投影光學系統之像差所造成者,也考慮:: 81 200400540 片上之圖案描畫誤差所造成之情形。& 了減低這種主因所 造成之正交2軸方向之線圖案像彼此之線寬差,也能使用 本^明之投衫光學系統之調整方法、曝光方法、或曝光裝 置。延種情形係與上述實施形態同樣,根據所量測之第工 光學特性,例如,查涅克多項式之第12工員值、與已知之 第1線圖案之線寬與與此正交之第2線圖案之線寬差(描晝 誤差):因與第1光學特性之相互作用,而使藉由投影光學 系、杨成在像面上之前述第j線圖案像線寬與前述第2線Others can also consider the optical characteristics of 帛 1 as the second and thirteenth rotational symmetry components of order (m-4) other than the above-mentioned 12th and 13th terms of the Chakker polynomial of expanded wavefront aberration. 2 The optical characteristic is regarded as a rotationally symmetric component of the same order as the second-order rotationally symmetric component described in item 7 (2). Foot sample-come 'When the size of the first optical characteristic is not zero, it is based on the difference between the line widths of the two patterns of line patterns orthogonal to the measurement based on the size of the first light and the two orthogonal directions of the measurement.帛 2 Optical characteristics, the projection optical system PL is adjusted, and it is estimated that the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained. And 'as far as the combination of the first optical photonic characteristic and the second optical characteristic that affects the aforementioned vertical and horizontal line difference width (νίί difference), in addition to the 9th and 12th terms of the Zernike polynomial described above In addition to the combination, there are also the 6th (coefficient Z6) and 18th (coefficient ZJ, 13th (coefficient Zi3) and 78 200400540 18th (coefficient Z18), 12th (coefficient zi2) and 17th ( Coefficient Z17), etc. The inventors etc. 'can effectively determine whether the combination of the Zernike polynomial term (Chag's gram term) that develops wavefront aberrations is the cause of the VH difference, so they are used to specifically find the cause of the VH difference The combined simulation is shown in Fig. 13. Figure 13 shows the graph when the light source is an ArF excimer laser (wavelength is 193nm), the numerical aperture of the projection optical system pL (na) = 〇68, the illumination σ -0.85, and the 2/3 ring zone. Under the lighting conditions, the isolated line (2 # interval moment) with a line width of 140nm (including the hood deviation ·· + 4 Xinjiang) is used as the line pattern with the conversion value on the wafer, and the transmission rate is 6%. Half-tone phase shift hood (reticle), processing the line width of isolated lines on the wafer The calculation result of the parent term between the aberrations at 100 nm. In this figure, Zi (i = 4 ~ 20) represents the first term of the Zernike term. In this figure, the oblique The upper right side of the boundary line is the size of the parent line of the aberrations (Chagneck term) and the horizontal line, and the lower left side is the size of the line of the father cross term of each aberration (Zanek term). From this section The table in Figure 13 shows that the intersection of the combination of item 9 (Z9) and item 12 (Z12) is 759 on the horizontal line and _-759 on the vertical line. The signs are exactly the opposite. ', His item 6 ( Z6) and item 18 (Z18), item 13 (Z13) and item 18 (Z18) 'item 12 (Z12) and item 17?), Etc., the intersection of vertical and horizontal lines and the opposite sign are also opposite , Become the original head of the VH difference. As for the combination of the first optical characteristic and the second optical characteristic, although the above-mentioned combinations of the various search / conversion terms are considered, it is not limited to this, and the first optical characteristic may be regarded as an astigmatic aberration Consider the second optical characteristic as spherical aberration 79 200400540. In this way, if the interaction between the astigmatic aberration and spherical aberration is considered to affect the line width difference between the vertical line pattern image and the horizontal line pattern image, astigmatism exists when the measurement results of the optical characteristics of the projection optical system are present. In the case of aberration, the line width difference between the astigmatic aberration and the measured line patterns in the orthogonal 2 axis directions is different. In order to control the spherical aberration, the projection optical system is adjusted to control the line width. difference. It is clear if considering this situation, but the optical characteristic measuring device of the projection optical system PL is not limited to the wavefront aberration measuring device, but may be used to measure the spherical aberration and image of the projection optical system pL. Astigmatic aberration and other so-called 5 aberration devices of Saidakura. For example, there is a so-called aerial image measuring device, which is formed on the wafer stage WST to form a slit-shaped or rectangular-shaped opening pattern, and it is a predetermined pattern formed by the projection optical system π. The space image of the measurement pattern is measured to scan the opening pattern. The photoelectric element is used to detect light passing through the opening pattern. Further, in the above embodiment, the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL · is directly measured using the wavefront aberration measuring device 80, but it is not limited to this because the twelfth term (the coefficient zy is a high-order astigmatic aberration) Therefore, for example, it is also possible to obtain the preferred focus positions of a plurality of L / s patterns (or η-line patterns with different directions) with different periodic directions. The astigmatic aberrations obtained from this result are the most suitable. The Xiaoping method et al. Calculated the unterminated coefficients of the linear combination of the low-order astigmatic aberration term (coefficient B) and the high-order slit aberration term (coefficient ZO 2), which were used to determine the 12th term ( The approximate value of the coefficient Zιζ). The above-mentioned different focal positions of the L / sw case with different periodic directions are obtained. The position of the wafer is changed by changing the optical axis direction of the wafer. 200400540 〃 is formed in each irradiation area on the circle obtained by printing the above pattern on the wafer), and the above-mentioned aerial image measuring device can also be used, and the light of this aerial image measuring device can be changed. The position of the axis direction, the space plane of the above figure Γ is measured: Calculated based on the measurement results of this aerial image. Muji: The same structure as the above-mentioned embodiment is used to configure the line width measurement. The measurement is not limited to a photoresist image, and it can also be formed on a wafer. The line width of the latent image or engraved image of the aforementioned vertical line pattern and horizontal line pattern. Alternatively, the line width measurement device may be constituted by an aerial image measurement device. In this case, for example, on the image plane An m-image image measuring device that forms a vertical line pattern and a horizontal line pattern is used to measure the line width of the space image. That is, the simultaneous line image :: measurement of line and line width. ^ $ In the above embodiment, In order to simplify the explanation, the difference between the line width of the image of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern is substantially zero: it will be explained when the width difference is controlled. It is not limited to this. If it is a pattern in the orthogonal 2 axis direction:,, then it has nothing to do with the line width (even if the line width is: 2: the control of the line width difference between some images. For the control of the line width difference The language approached the line width difference of the pattern image of the line width difference on the design correctly. The shadow optical system is installed in the state of clothing) to adjust the projection optical system, but for example, in the manufacturing process of a device (especially a projection optical system), it is also possible to use a single unit to adjust the projection optical system before entering the exposure device. ° In exposure, however, the two main lines of the orthogonal pattern of the direction of the car are caused by the aberrations of the projection optical system. Also consider: 81 200400540 The pattern drawing error caused by the film. & Amp In order to reduce the difference between the line widths of the orthogonal two-axis line pattern images caused by this main cause, the adjustment method, exposure method, or exposure device of the optical system of the present invention can also be used. The extended case is related to Similarly to the above embodiment, according to the measured optical characteristics of the first line, for example, the twelfth worker value of the Zernike polynomial, the line width of the known first line pattern, and the line width of the second line pattern orthogonal to this. Difference (Daylight Error): Due to the interaction with the first optical characteristic, the image line width of the j-th line pattern on the image plane and the second line by the projection optical system and Yang Cheng
圖案像線寬之差(線寬差)受影響之第2光學特性,例如, 為了拴制查涅克多項式帛9項之大小,調整投影光學系統 因此,藉由投影光學系統形成在像面上之第丨線圖案像 線寬與前述第2線圖案像線寬之差(線寬差),當因標線片 上之圖案之描晝誤差等原因而產生時,能自由控制正交之 線圖案彼此之線寬差。 1上之說明也可知,能得到投影光學系統之法 面像差之貧訊,能進—步得到有_案投影像之資訊,售The second optical characteristic of the difference in line width (line width difference) of the pattern image is affected. For example, in order to restrain the size of the 9th term of the Zernike polynomial, the projection optical system is adjusted. Therefore, the projection optical system is formed on the image surface. The difference (line width difference) between the line width of the first line pattern image and the line width of the second line pattern image described above can be controlled freely when the line pattern is orthogonal due to the day-to-day error of the pattern on the reticle. Line width difference between each other. It can also be seen from the description on 1 that the poor information of the aberration of the method of the projection optical system can be obtained, and the information of the case image can be further obtained.
進-:根據這些資訊來調整投影光學系統之際,係使用: 涅克多項式,在將前述波面像差級數展開之複數個查涅衷 員中也可對别述投影像特性之變化(該相互作用影塑 投影像特性之任意查埋克項之組合之交又項),考慮 感度,來調整前述投影光學李 、 克 傻M w 來,對前述投影 像特性之變化(習知所未考慮之該相互仙影 特性之任音杳、、s古馆+ ,人 ^像 〜、一涅克員之組合之交叉項),考慮查涅克感户, 來調整投影光學系、統,故習知調整困難之像差成份,:如 82 200400540 ’也能調整高階像差成份等,能調整圖案像之形成狀態更 佳之投影光學系統。在這種情形τ,當圖案包含線圖案時 ,就前述投影像之特性而言,也可對至少包含該線圖案之 線寬之特性變4匕’考慮、查淫克感度。χ,這種情形也可使 用调整後之ix W光學系、统’將電路圖案轉印在晶圓等物體 上這種炀幵》也能實現高精度之圖案轉印。 -4疋不僅縱秘線之線寬差,而且孤立之線圖案像之Jin-: When adjusting the projection optical system based on this information, use: Niek polynomials, which can be used to change the characteristics of other projection images in a plurality of Zhani members who expand the wavefront aberration series. The characteristics of the interactive projection and projection projection characteristics are combined with any combination of grammar and projection items), and the sensitivity is used to adjust the aforementioned projection optical characteristics and grammar M w to change the aforementioned projection image characteristics (not considered in the conventional knowledge) The cross-terms of the combination of the characteristics of each other's fairy shadow, s 古 馆 +, portrait ^, and a combination of Niek members), consider the Zanike senses to adjust the projection optics, system, and practice Know the aberration components that are difficult to adjust, such as 82 200400540 'Can also adjust high-order aberration components, etc., and can adjust the projection optical system with a better formation state of the pattern image. In this case τ, when the pattern includes a line pattern, as far as the characteristics of the aforementioned projection image, the characteristics including at least the line width of the line pattern can also be considered and the sensitivity can be checked. χ, in this case, the adjusted ix W optical system and system can also be used to transfer circuit patterns onto wafers and other objects. This also enables high-precision pattern transfer. -4 疋 Not only the line width difference of the vertical secret line, but also the isolated line pattern like
線寬也受散焦量之影響。此處,#明者等為了求出前述之 CD-聚焦曲線,進行實驗。 (slice level),求出在+〇15//m散焦之位置之線寬偏差么 CD。 就曝光條件而言,係假定光源為ArF準分子雷射(波長 為193nm) ’投影光學系統pL之數值孔徑(na)=178,照明 σ =0.85’ 2/3環帶照明條件,對象圖案形成在…半色調遮 光罩(標線片)’用晶圓換算值,線寬為lOOnm之孤立線(2 私m間距)又,在無像差且無散焦之條件下,求出曝光量 例如,將50m又之像差輸入光學 項到第37項求出查涅克感度的The line width is also affected by the amount of defocus. Here, # 明 者 等 is performing experiments in order to obtain the aforementioned CD-focus curve. (slice level), to find the line width deviation CD at the position of + 0.15 // m defocus. In terms of exposure conditions, it is assumed that the light source is an ArF excimer laser (wavelength: 193nm) 'Numerical aperture (na) of the projection optical system pL = 178, illumination σ = 0.85' 2/3 ring-shaped illumination conditions, object pattern formation Calculate the exposure amount at the half-tone hood (reticle) 'using wafer conversion values, an isolated line with a line width of 100 nm (2 μm pitch), and with no aberrations and no defocusing, for example , Input the 50m aberration into the optical term to the 37th term to find the Zernike sensitivity
單純在各查涅克項 模擬用之電腦,若從第 話,則如第14圖所示。在第14圖中,橫軸之z.1(i = 37)係表示各查涅克項。 在白知之查〆圼克感度法(Zernike Sensitivity法:以 間稱「ZS法」)中 台匕田 4 ;^ 此用下式(19)所表示之ZemThe computer used in the simulation of each Zanek term is shown in Figure 14 if it is from the first. In Fig. 14, z.1 (i = 37) on the horizontal axis represents each Zanek term. In Bai Zhizhi ’s Zernike Sensitivity method (herein referred to as the “ZS method”), Zhongtai Datian 4; ^ This is expressed by the following formula (19)
Sensitivity(以下, )Si(i = l 〜37)、與第 稱為「查涅克感度」或簡稱「zs」 η量測點(以下,也稱為量測點…之各 83 200400540 查/里克項之大小cn,i(=係數zd之線性結合來表示線寬偏差 △ CD。又’以下,將Cn,i簡稱為各量測點之查涅克項成份 (查埋克項成份)。 37 ACD = ^SiCni ··. (19) /=1 但是,在使用上式(19)之ZS法之計算結果、與提供適 田之波面像差直接計算空間像之手法之間,看得見第i 5 圖之曲線所示之乖離。即m式(19)之ZS法之計算誤 差過大。 因此,發明者等考慮在將聚焦與線寬當作座標軸之2 、准面内使CD-聚焦曲線移動,來推定線寬之方法。 上述,因直接用查》圼克項成份之線性結合來表示△ CD之手法之線寬預測誤差大,故在查涅克感度之算出與 △CD之計算之間,加CD·聚焦曲線之平行移動之一個步Sensitivity (hereinafter,) Si (i = l to 37), and the measurement point (hereinafter referred to as the measurement point, etc.) called "Zanek Sensitivity" or "zs" for short. The size of the gram term cn, i (= the linear combination of the coefficient zd represents the line width deviation ΔCD. Also, hereinafter, Cn, i is simply referred to as the Zanek term component (choke gram component) of each measurement point. 37 ACD = ^ SiCni ··· (19) / = 1 However, it can be seen between the calculation result of the ZS method using the above formula (19) and the method of directly calculating the spatial image by providing the wavefront aberration of Shida. The deviation shown by the curve in Fig. I 5 is that the calculation error of the ZS method of m formula (19) is too large. Therefore, the inventors considered to make the CD-focus in the quasi-plane using the focus and line width as the coordinate axis 2 The method of estimating the line width by moving the curve. As mentioned above, because the line width prediction error of the method of △ CD is directly expressed by the linear combination of the components of the 圼 圼 term, the calculation of the 查 CD sensitivity and the calculation of △ CD are large. Add one step of parallel movement of CD · focus curve between
:,根據該步驟(平行移動)執行後之CD_聚焦曲線,採用 异出Δ CD之手法。 例如,關於CD-聚焦曲線之移動,係分別用查淫克感 度來表不各量測點n之聚焦方向之移動量⑹與線寬(⑶) 方向之移動量(D。其次’例如’也可平行移動产取)之 y^f(x-an)+/5n^ CD.;Tl 焦曲線,針對新作成之函數來計算△ cD。 (預測方法) 以下 針對本發明之預測方法一 例之CD-聚焦曲線預 84 200400540 測方法之實施形悲’順著表示該處理流程之流程圖(第16 圖、第24 ffi ),且適當參照其他圖面力口以說明。 在本實施形態中,關於曝光裝置1〇〇之前述波面像差 之各量測,點n(n=1〜33)’係使用包含查淫克項成份cni之 複數員之線性、•。合之查涅克感度法,來預測圖案投影像之 特性之—之CD-聚焦曲、線。就各查淫克項成份Cn>i而言, 也可^藉由模擬用電⑩46上之成像模擬所預先求出者: According to the CD_focus curve after this step (parallel movement) is performed, the method of ΔCD is adopted. For example, the movement of the CD-focus curve refers to the movement of the focus direction 各 and the movement of the line width (⑶) in the direction of the measurement point n (D.). Y ^ f (x-an) + / 5n ^ CD .; Tl focal curve, for the newly created function, calculate △ cD. (Prediction method) The following is an example of the prediction method of the present invention, the CD-focus curve preview 84 200400540. The implementation of the measurement method is shown in the flow chart (Figure 16 and 24 ffi) along with the process flow, and with reference to other The drawing is illustrated. In the present embodiment, regarding each measurement of the wavefront aberrations of the exposure device 100, the point n (n = 1 to 33) 'is a linearity using a plural number including a check component cini. Combined with the Zanek sensitivity method, to predict the characteristics of the pattern projection image-the CD-focus curve and line. As for the components Cn > i of each grammatical term, it can also be obtained in advance by the imaging simulation on the simulation battery 46.
如則述,也可使用藉由波面像差量測裝置8〇之量測所 求出之值。 ' 首先,在第16圖之步驟2〇2中,係透過模擬用電腦 46之輸人裝置’將包含實際曝光時之光學條件(例如,照 明光EL <波長’即曝光波長(及曝光用之光源16之種類 等)、投影光學系統PL之最λΝΑ(數值孔徑)、❹NA(在 本實施形態中,曝光時,用開σ光圈15戶斤設定之數值孔 徑)、相干係數σ值(照明σ )或照明ΝΑ(照明光學系統之數 值孔徑)、及標線片之照明條件(照明光學系統光瞳面上之As described above, the value obtained by the measurement by the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 may be used. 'First, in step 202 of FIG. 16, the input device through the simulation computer 46 will include the optical conditions at the time of actual exposure (for example, the illumination light EL < wavelength', that is, the exposure wavelength (and Types of light source 16, etc.), the highest λNA (numerical aperture) of the projection optical system PL, ❹NA (in this embodiment, the numerical aperture set by opening 15 sigma aperture during exposure), coherence coefficient σ value (illumination σ) or illumination NA (the numerical aperture of the illumination optical system), and the illumination conditions of the reticle (the pupil surface of the illumination optical system
照明光EL之光量分布、即2次光源之形狀與大小)等)等之 曝光條件設定在模擬用電腦46。此時’在模擬用電腦46 上’成像模擬器業已啟動,在該畫面i,顯示成像模擬器 之曝光條件設定畫面。作業者等係依照該設定畫面,設定 實際曝光所使用之光學條件等q,#設定料光條件時 ’有關分別轉印在各量測點n(n=1〜3取標線片上之圖案 瓜狀大小等圖案之資訊也—併加以設定。就有關圖案之 貝汛而5 ,例如,有孤立線圖案、線與間隙(L/s)圖案、線 85 200400540 其: 圖案種類(也包含是否為移相圖案及 為圖案之線寬、長度、間距等圖案大 案之選擇係、根據可評價之評價項目來決定。例如= 則伊2作同* ’若把縱橫之線寬差當作評價項目的話, “了弟5圖所示之標線片^之相互正交之線圖案所 y成之軚線片者,必須設定有關該標 ^ ^ _ 八乃上之圖案資訊。The exposure conditions of the light amount distribution of the illumination light EL, that is, the shape and size of the secondary light source, etc.) are set in the simulation computer 46. At this time, the imaging simulator "on the simulation computer 46" has been started, and on this screen i, the exposure condition setting screen of the imaging simulator is displayed. The operator and others set the optical conditions used in the actual exposure in accordance with the setting screen. #When setting the lighting conditions, 'relevant patterns are transferred to each measurement point n (n = 1 ~ 3 to take the pattern on the graticule). Information about patterns such as shape, size, etc. is also set. Regarding the pattern of the pattern, 5 for example, there are isolated line patterns, line and gap (L / s) patterns, lines 85 200400540, which: the type of pattern (including whether it is The phase-shifting pattern and the selection of major patterns such as the line width, length, and spacing of the pattern are determined based on the evaluation items that can be evaluated. For example, = then Yi 2 is the same as * 'If the vertical and horizontal line width difference is used as the evaluation item "If you have a reticle formed by the orthogonal line patterns of the reticle ^ shown in Figure 5 above, you must set information about the pattern ^ ^ _ Yano.
此處,為了間化說明’纟各量測點’使用同—大小之孤立 繼所:成之標嶋,設定該標線片上之圖案資訊。 在下一步驟204中,藉由成像模擬來進行投影光學系 統無像差時之CD·聚焦曲線之作成。具體而言,作業者等 係對模擬用電腦46,透過輸入裝置來指示投影光學系2 PL無像差時之CD_聚焦曲線之作成。應答該指,二擬用 電腦46係在用上述步驟2〇2所設定之曝光條件下,'假定 投影光學系統無像差時之狀態下,即在(即式(3 )所厂、之杳 涅克項成份Zi(i = l〜37,即Cn」全部設定為〇之狀能下,Here, in order to explain ‘说明 each measurement point’, the same-sized isolated relay is used: the standard mark is set, and the pattern information on the reticle is set. In the next step 204, the imaging simulation is performed to create a CD · focus curve when the projection optical system has no aberrations. Specifically, the operator or the like instructs the simulation computer 46 to create the CD_focus curve when the projection optical system 2 PL has no aberration through the input device. In response to this indication, the second proposed computer 46 is under the exposure conditions set in step 202 above, 'assuming that the projection optical system has no aberrations, that is, in (that is, the factory of formula (3), The Niek term component Zi (i = l ~ 37, that is, Cn "is all set to 0,
藉由成像模擬器來作成線圖案之線寬對散焦量之變:,即 ,作成CD-聚焦曲線。 在下一步驟206中,模擬用電腦46係用下式(2〇)所示 之10次函數來調整所作成之CD-聚焦曲線。 y=Cax10 + Cbx8 + Ccx6+Cdx4 + Cex2+Cf (2〇) 式中,X係散焦量,y係對應該散隹晉 狀…、里之對象圖案(在 上述步驟202中,設定圖案資訊之線圖案)像之線寬,c〜 Cf係該1 〇次函數各階項之係數。由該式(2〇)可知,兮函數 係只由2階到10次之偶數階項所構成之函數。第圖 86The line width versus defocus amount of the line pattern is made by the imaging simulator: that is, a CD-focus curve is made. In the next step 206, the simulation computer 46 adjusts the created CD-focus curve using a 10-degree function shown in the following formula (20). y = Cax10 + Cbx8 + Ccx6 + Cdx4 + Cex2 + Cf (2〇) In the formula, X is the defocus amount, and y is the object pattern corresponding to the defocused shape ..., in step 202 above, set the pattern information Line pattern) image line width, c ~ Cf are coefficients of each order of the 10th order function. From this formula (20), it can be seen that the Xi function is a function composed of even-order terms of the 2nd to 10th order. Fig. 86
ZUU4UU^4(J 係表不該調整之結果所得到<ZUU4UU ^ 4 (J is the result obtained if the table should not be adjusted <
圖係表示該^函數師 ^數之—例,第17B 線之調整誤差之—例。、二像拉擬所得到之CD-聚焦曲 調整誤差係在±0.02細以下1奸=知,10次函數之 卜5周整精度非常高。 ,/由步驟2G8中,作業者等係使用模擬用電腦46 产S々.。μ·走 一涅克項對政焦量之查涅克感 :後处’例如,若只輸入1種用查涅克多項式所表 :之像差,來製作CD-聚焦曲線的話,則可知進行各項相 -之分配。此處,在該分配中,|出較佳聚焦位置之變化 〇 第Μ圖係表示該查淫克感度Sai。在第18圖中,橫 軸〜37)係表示各查涅克項。如第18圖所示,對散 焦量有感度係成為查涅克項z4、z9、Zi6、z25、Z36、z”、 、旋轉成伤或z5、zi2、Zn、Z21、z28、z32等之2階旋轉 成伤,即僅偶數0成份。其他(奇數0成份)係查涅克感度 為零’故CD-聚焦曲線,關於聚焦方向之移位,奇數0成 知不受影響,像差間之交叉項也不受影響。 _ 第工9圖表示分別從一 50m入到50m λ,用10m λ間距 使第9項(Ζ·9)、第12項(2.12)、第16項(Ζ·16)之3種之各 查淫克項移動11點時之聚焦方向之移動量(a j之變化情 况。在第丨9圖中,係根據各11點之各移動量,使用最小 平方法所求出之直線斜率也一併表示。即,各直線之斜率 成為各查涅克項感度之值。又,在第19圖中,雖只代表 性地表示第9項(Ζ.9)、第12項(Ζ·12)、第16項(Ζ.16)之3 87 200400540 種類,但關於其他之查涅克項,若像差量也係該範圍的話 ,則能確認大致完全保持線性。由第19圖也可知,因相 關係數R2与1,故通常之查涅克感度之計算,為了節省時 門也可八輸入1值像差來求出直線之斜率,此處,以再 確β忍與導出更正確值為目的,從一 5〇m λ到5〇ηι又,用 1 0m又間距计# ! i點聚焦方向之移動量(q j,使用最小平 方法來計算直線之斜率(即,查涅克感度之值)。The figure shows an example of the number of functionists and an example of the adjustment error of line 17B. The adjustment error of the CD-focusing curve obtained by the second image drawing is less than ± 0.02, and the accuracy is 5 weeks. / In step 2G8, the operator and the like use the simulation computer 46 to produce S々. μ · Take a Niek term to the Zanek sense of political focus: Behind the 'For example, if you only input 1 kind of aberrations expressed by Zanek polynomials to make a CD-focus curve, you can know that Phases-distribution. Here, in this allocation, the change in the preferred focus position is shown. The M-th graph shows the search sensitivity Sai. In Fig. 18, the horizontal axis to 37) indicate each Zanek term. As shown in Fig. 18, the sensitivity to the defocus amount becomes the Zaneck term z4, z9, Zi6, z25, Z36, z ", or rotation injury or z5, zi2, Zn, Z21, z28, z32, etc. The second-order rotation becomes wound, that is, only the even number of 0 components. The other (odd number of 0 components) is that the Zanek sensitivity is zero. Therefore, the CD-focus curve, with regard to the shift of the focus direction, the odd number of 0 is not affected. The cross terms are not affected. _ Fig. 9 shows that from 50m to 50m λ, the 10th λ spacing is used to make the 9th (Z · 9), 12th (2.12), and 16th (Z · 16) The amount of movement in the focus direction (aj's change) of each of the three types of grammar items when moving 11 points. In Figure 丨 9, it is obtained by using the least square method according to the amount of movement of each 11 points The slopes of the straight lines are also shown together. That is, the slopes of the straight lines become the values of the sensitivities of the Zanike terms. In Fig. 19, only the 9th item (Z.9) and the 12th item are representatively shown. Item (Z · 12), Item 16 (Z.16) of 3 87 200400540, but for other Zanike terms, if the amount of aberration is also within this range, it can be confirmed that the line is almost completely maintained As can be seen from Figure 19, because the correlation coefficients R2 and 1, the usual Zanek sensitivity is calculated. In order to save time, you can also enter a 1-value aberration to obtain the slope of the straight line. Here, to confirm β tolerance and derivation of more correct values for the purpose, from a 50m λ to 50m, and with a distance of 10m #! i point focus direction movement (qj, using the least square method to calculate the slope of the straight line ( That is, the value of Zanek's sensitivity).
其-人,在步驟2 1 0中,模擬用電腦私係使用各查涅克 項之查涅克感| Sai、與各量測點η㈣〜3”之查涅克項 成伤〜3 3),使用與求出综合焦點差(tfd)、像散像 差曰球面像差量等之查淫克感纟法同樣式之下式(21),求 出里測點n (n = 1 3 3 )之 「耳只也上 J之CD-t焦曲線之聚焦方向之偏移量 « η ° 37 an^Y,SaiCni (21) /=1 4疋在各查涅克項,從~ 50m λ到50m又,用l〇mIts-man, in step 2 10, simulate the use of the Chagnek sense of each Chagnek term by a computer for private use | Sai, and the Chagnek term of each measurement point η㈣ ~ 3 ”wounds ~ 3 3) , Using the same formula (21) as the method of obtaining the comprehensive focus difference (tfd), astigmatic aberration, and spherical aberration, the following formula (21) is used to find the n-point (n = 1 3 3 ) "The offset of the focus direction of the CD-t focal curve of J on the ear is also« η ° 37 an ^ Y, SaiCni (21) / = 1 4 疋 In each Zanike term, from ~ 50m 50m again, use 10m
門距輸入1 1點像差,從其分配求出沒η(較佳聚焦位置之 線寬艾化)與像差關係之情形,像差量無論是正或負,影響 都:同’若像差增加的話,則從觀察其比例關係以上之像 :惡化’ /5 η能㈣用各查:¾克項成份平方之線性結合 表示者。 此處,在下一步驟212中’作業者係使用模擬電腦 在所③定之曝光條件下,#由空間像計算來求出各查 門】f:之平方對線圖案線寬之查涅克感度s ^。在用 a 6十异所得到之11點之線寬變化量之計算中,假定 88 200400540 P白函數’藉由最小平方法,趨近近似來看的話,則如第μ 圖所示,此觀察到搭載在y==sx2之函數。又,在第2〇圖中 ,雖僅代表性地表示第6項(26)、第7項(27)、第9項 (ζ·9)之3種類’但關於其他之查涅克項,確認也能用二次 函數來表不。又’第21圖係表示各查涅克項之感度S/5 1 37)。在第21圖中,橫軸之Z i(i=1〜37)係表示各查 /里克項。如第21圖所示,對該線寬變化,奇數0成份、 偶數Θ成份都有感度。 其次,在步驟2 14中,模擬用電腦46係從記憶體讀出 各里測點之查涅克項成份Cn,i,並且使用下式(22),求出線 圖案線寬方向之CD-聚焦曲線之偏離量 37 n (22) /=1 其次,在步驟216中,模擬用電腦46係使用上述步驟 210所求出之αη與使用上述步驟214所求出之万。,根據 下式(23),求出量測點η(η=1〜33)之CD·聚焦曲線。藉此 所求出之CD-聚焦曲線係成為考慮量測點n之投影光學系 統PL之像差時所預測各量測點η之CD-聚焦曲線。但是 ’此處所求出之CD-聚焦曲線,仍未考慮其變形。 yn=ca(X - α。1。+ Cb(x— α n)8+ c“x — α n)6+ Cd(x — α j4 + ce(x— a n)2+ Cf+ 冷 n …(23) 又’當求/? n時,也能使用下式(24)來取代上式(22)。 37 37 /=1 y=l 89 (24) 200400540 上述=式(2 4)係為了考慮彼此相異之查沒克項彼此間 之積,~前述之交叉項,而擴充式(22)者。即,圖案像之 線寬不僅受式(22)所示之各查淫克項成份平方之影響,而 且也受交又項之影響。如第22A圖、帛2扣圖之圖:所示 ’藉由像差之組合,線寬分布係分布在傾斜之橢圓上(直係 第22A圖係Ζ·6# Z.I3之關係,第22丑圖係ζ·9與m 之關係這種情形,這些像S組合之交又項係對線寬變化 具有感度。第23圖係表示交又項對線圖案線寬之感度(串 訊)。又,在式(24)中,在叫之S/5jj之處,加入與式⑼ 之相同之值,在式(24)之中,若只取出2項的話,例 如,則成為下式(25)之形式。 ...(25) 、 式可知,此表示第22B圖之圖形所示之傾斜橢圓 分布。實際上,料算交又項的話,則在相當多之項間, 能確認交又項之存在。 由X上之π兒明可知’對某像差之查涅克項之CD-聚隹The door distance is input by 11 points of aberration, and the relationship between η (the line width of the preferred focus position) and the aberration is obtained from its distribution. Whether the amount of aberration is positive or negative, the effect is the same: 'if the aberration increases Then, from the observation of the proportional relationship above the image: Deterioration '/ 5 η can be expressed by each combination: a linear combination of ¾ grams of component squared. Here, in the next step 212, the operator uses a simulation computer under the predetermined exposure conditions. #Calculate each check by aerial image.] F: Zanek sensitivity s of the square pair line pattern line width ^. In the calculation of the line width variation of 11 points obtained by using a 6 ten different, it is assumed that 88 200400540 P white function 'approximated by the method of least squares, as shown in Figure μ, this observation To the function mounted on y == sx2. In Fig. 20, although only three types of the 6th item (26), the 7th item (27), and the 9th item (ζ · 9) are representatively shown, with regard to the other Zanike terms, Confirm that you can also use the quadratic function to express. Also, Fig. 21 shows the sensitivity of each Zanek term (S / 5 1 37). In Fig. 21, Z i (i = 1 to 37) on the horizontal axis represents each Chak / Rick term. As shown in FIG. 21, for the line width change, the odd-numbered 0 component and the even-numbered Θ component have sensitivity. Next, in step 2-14, the simulation computer 46 reads the Zernike term components Cn, i of the measuring points from the memory, and uses the following formula (22) to find the CD- Deviation of the focus curve 37 n (22) / = 1 Next, in step 216, the simulation computer 46 uses the αη obtained in the above step 210 and the 10,000 obtained in the above step 214. Based on the following formula (23), the CD · focus curve of the measurement point η (η = 1 to 33) is obtained. The thus obtained CD-focus curve is a CD-focus curve predicted at each measurement point η when the aberration of the projection optical system PL of the measurement point n is considered. However, the deformation of the CD-focus curve obtained here has not been considered. yn = ca (X-α. 1. + Cb (x— α n) 8+ c “x — α n) 6+ Cd (x — α j4 + ce (x— an) 2+ Cf + cold n… (23 ) Again, when /? N is found, the following formula (24) can also be used instead of the above formula (22). 37 37 / = 1 y = l 89 (24) 200400540 The above = formula (2 4) is to consider each other The product of different chamograms, ~ the cross term described above, and the extended formula (22). That is, the line width of the pattern image is not only affected by the square of the components of each chamogram in formula (22). It is also affected by the cross-terms. As shown in Figure 22A and Figure 2: The line width distribution is distributed on the inclined ellipse by the combination of aberrations (Straight 22A The relationship between Z · 6 # Z.I3, the 22nd ugly picture is the relationship between ζ · 9 and m. These intersections like the S combination have sensitivity to the line width change. The 23rd figure shows the intersection Sensitivity (crosstalk) to the line width of the line pattern. In Equation (24), where S / 5jj is called, add the same value as in Equation ⑼. In Equation (24), if you only take For two terms, for example, it will be in the form of the following formula (25) .... (25) and formula can be seen, this shows Figure 22B The figure shows the oblique ellipse distribution. In fact, if the intersection term is expected to be calculated, then the existence of the intersection term can be confirmed in a considerable number of terms. From the π on X, it can be known that 'a certain aberration check CD-poly
曲線之影響能用對CD_聚焦曲線之聚焦方向之 I 線寬之變化來表示。 〃取 其夂,在第24之步驟302中,模擬用電腦46係藉由 使用成像核擬器空間像計算,在實際上存在像差之狀態下 在各S測點求出投影光學系統PL之CD-聚焦曲線。關 於實際像差之資訊也可透過主控刪5〇,從記憶裝置 42讀二前述所求出之波面像差來進行。 人’在步驟304中,模擬用電腦46係用上述步驟 90 200400540 302 ’用下式(26)所示之5次函數 算出CD-聚焦曲線、與制上式’使表示藉由成像模擬來 線之差份之差份函數y,n近似。)所斤出之CD-聚焦曲 y’n= r 5η(χ — α n)5+ 6 4η(χ— α 、2 Π 7 3η(Χ — α η)3+ 6 2„(Χ — α r 1„(χ~ α η)…(26) 式中,7 5η、(J 4η、7 3η、占 2 之各階項之係數。The effect of the curve can be expressed by the change in the I line width of the focus direction of the CD_focus curve. Whichever is selected, in step 302 of the 24th, the simulation computer 46 calculates the projection optical system PL at each S measurement point by using an imaging simulator space image calculation in the state where there is actually aberration. CD-focus curve. The information on actual aberrations can also be deleted by the master control 50, and read from the memory device 42 for the wavefront aberrations obtained above. In step 304, the simulation computer 46 uses the above-mentioned step 90 200400540 302 'calculates the CD-focus curve using a fifth-order function shown in the following formula (26), and the formula is used to make the line through imaging simulation The difference function y, n of the difference is approximate. ) CD-focusing curve y'n = r 5η (χ — α n) 5+ 6 4η (χ— α, 2 Π 7 3η (χ — α η) 3+ 6 2 „(χ — α r 1 „(χ ~ α η) ... (26) In the formula, 7 5η, (J 4η, 7 3η, coefficients of each order of 2).
成合货、数 7 5n、5 4n、r 3n、Λ 0 、曰* s ^ v 6 2n、y in也能用包含 >圼克項成伤c項之線性結合 水表不。具體而言,奇數 之項(以下稱為奇數項)之係數7 5、 、e出s 1 n r 3n、r ln係能用各 違克項成份Cn,i項之線性結合來表 y ^ μ 表不,偶數階之項(以下 為偶數項)之係數6 4η、5 2係能田々士 η 、你把用各查涅克項成份之平 cn,i之線性結合來表示。 此處,在-步驟30"’模擬用電腦46係著眼在 (26)所示之y,n之奇數項,#由空間像計算來求出 :It can be combined with the number 7 5n, 5 4n, r 3n, Λ 0, * s ^ v 6 2n, and y in. It is also possible to use a linear combination that includes the > gram term and the c term. Specifically, the coefficients of the odd-numbered terms (hereinafter referred to as odd-numbered terms) 7 5,, e out s 1 nr 3n, r ln can be expressed by the linear combination of the components Cn, i of each violation term to show y ^ μ Table No, the coefficients of the even-order terms (the following are even-numbered terms) 6 4η, 5 2 are Noda Junshi η, you use the linear combination of the flat cn, i of each Zanek term component. Here, at -step 30 " ’the simulation computer 46 looks at the odd-numbered terms of y and n shown in (26), and # is calculated from the aerial image:
對5次、3次、1次之待致r ^ η、r 1η之查涅克項-之又s r 5i、S r 3i、s 7 ln。第25圖〜第27圖係分別表: 各查涅克項之感度Sr 51、Sr 3i、sr 1"之一例。 在下一步驟308中,模擬用電腦46係著眼在函數〆 之偶數項,藉由空間像計算來求出各查涅克項成份之方 、™ 4階之係數5 4n、2階之係數$ 2n之各查涅克項 之感度8 5 4i、S 5 h。第28圖、第29圖係分別表示各查 〆里克項成份之平方cn,i2之感度s 5 4i、S (5 2i之一例。 91 200400540 又,在步驟301中,模擬用電腦邨係使用以下之式 (27)、式(28),來求出投影光學系、统PL之現在像差狀態之 量測點n(n=l〜33)中之5次、3次、丨次之係數卩n、& 、τ 1 n及4階、2階之係數(5 4n、(5 2n。 37 37 37 Y5n = iSy5,iCn^ = ^Sy3tiCn4 ^ = *·*(27) 37 . 37 54w=25(54,A/ δ2,=Σ5δ2,Α/ .. .(28) /:1 i=l , 藉由上式,能全部計算表示式(23)所示之函數l與式 (26)所表示之函數y,n之與之函數y,,n(=yn+y,n),量測點 n(=l〜33)之CD-聚焦曲線(也考慮變形者)係全部被預測。 第30圖係表示在設定之曝光條件下,在各量測點 n(n=l〜33)中,求出代表性所示之量測點k、^(卜丨〜32) 之CD-聚焦曲線y’,k、y,,k + 1時之模式圖。如第3〇圖所示, 本實施形態之預測方法係執行上述之步驟2〇2〜步驟3〇1 ,藉此,用10次函數y,使假定投影光學系統ρί之像差 為零時之CD-聚焦曲線近似,在藉由量測點k之查淫克項 成份Ck,i之線性結合,求出該1〇次函數丫之散焦量(橫軸) 之方向及線寬(縱軸)之方向,分別僅偏移U ^,進一步 ,使5次函數y’k份變形,藉此來預測量測點k之函數y,,k 。如前述,投影光學系統PL之光瞳面上之波面係因量測 點而異,故查涅克項成份Cy也因量測點而異。因此,上 述之y”k、y’’k+ι係不同之曲線。 92 200400540 第3 1Λ圖係藉由精密之成像模擬所算出之量測點1、 1 1、17、33之CD-聚焦曲線之一例,第31Β圖係藉由上述 之預測方法來預測同一曝光條件、同一圖案之量測點i、 1 1、17、33之CD-聚焦曲線之一例。如第31A圖、第 圖所示,藉由成像模擬之CD_聚焦曲線與藉由上述預測方 法所預測之CD-聚焦曲線係在各量測點非常一致,能高精 度地預測CD-聚焦曲線。即,若執行上述之預測方法的話 ,則在既定曝光條件下之既定圖案之轉印之際,能高精度 預測CD-聚焦曲線。 第32圖係表示有關線寬偏差△ cd,使用上述所說明 之ZS法之計算結果與提供適當之波面像差直接計算空間 像差之手法之關係。由比較該第32圖與前述之第丨5圖可 知,若使用新的ZS法的話,則能格外減低誤差。 由第32圖也可知,即使不藉由成像模擬來進行空間像 什异’用擴張ZS法也能正確計算線寬。 又,在上述之步驟202〜301之說明中,係以透過作業 者等為前提下來進行說明,但只進行作業者等之指定(步驟 2〇2),步驟204以後之處理,模擬用電腦46(或其他電腦 與杈擬用電腦連線)當然也能全部進行。也可取代前述之作 業者等之操作,從主電腦等提供指令。藉由變更軟體程式 ’能容易實現這種變形。 在杈擬用電腦46等之電腦中,進行上述曝光條件等指 定以外之處理程式,例如,能在CD(c〇mpact disc)、 (digital versatile disc)、M〇(magneto-optical disc)或 93 200400540 FD(flexible disc)等之資訊記錄媒 銷售。a π a 斤錄狀態下,能作為 鋼售卩口。當然透過網際網路等電 内容來轉讓等。 線路,也能以數位 (評價方法) 2用上述所預測之量測點卜量測點^瓜聚以 線,施評價曝光裝置100之圖宰 .加丄 口茶之杈影像(或轉印像)之特 二:1如’如上述,在投影光學系統〜體面側,在For the 5th, 3rd, and 1th time the Zernike terms of r ^ η and r 1η-s r 5i, S r 3i, s 7 ln. Figures 25 to 27 are tables respectively: Examples of the sensitivity Sr 51, Sr 3i, sr 1 " of each Zanike term. In the next step 308, the simulation computer 46 looks at the even term of the function 〆, and calculates the square of the components of each Zanek term through the aerial image calculation, the coefficient of the 4th order 5 4n, and the coefficient of the 2nd order $ 2n Sensitivity of each Zanike term is 8 5 4i, S 5 h. Figures 28 and 29 show the squares cn and i2 of each Chazlik item, respectively, as examples of the sensitivity s 5 4i, S (5 2i. 91 200400540 In step 301, the simulation is used by the computer village system. The following formulas (27) and (28) are used to find the coefficients of the fifth, third, and fifth of the measurement points n (n = 1 to 33) of the current aberration state of the projection optical system and the system PL.卩 n, &, τ 1 n, and 4th and 2nd-order coefficients (5 4n, (5 2n. 37 37 37 Y5n = iSy5, iCn ^ = ^ Sy3tiCn4 ^ = * · * (27) 37. 37 54w = 25 (54, A / δ2, = Σ5δ2, Α / ... (28) /: 1 i = l, with the above formula, all the functions l and (26) shown in the expression (23) can be calculated. The function y, n and the function y ,, n (= yn + y, n), and the CD-focus curve (also considering the deformer) of the measurement point n (= 1 to 33) are all predicted. Fig. 30 shows the representative CD-focus curves of the measurement points k and ^ (bu 丨 ~ 32) at each measurement point n (n = 1 to 33) under the set exposure conditions. y ', k, y, and k + 1. The pattern diagram at the time of k + 1. As shown in FIG. 30, the prediction method of this embodiment executes the above steps 2202 to 3301. With this, the 10-degree function y is used to approximate the CD-focus curve when the aberration of the projection optical system ρί is zero, and the linear combination of the components Ck, i of the search term k at the measurement point k is calculated to obtain The direction of the defocus amount (horizontal axis) and the line width (longitudinal axis) of the 10th-order function y are shifted by U ^ respectively, and further, the fifth-order function y'k is deformed to predict the amount. The function y, k of the measurement point k. As mentioned above, the wavefront on the pupil surface of the projection optical system PL varies depending on the measurement point, so the component of the Zernike term Cy also varies depending on the measurement point. Therefore, the above Y ”k, y” k + ι are different curves. 92 200400540 Figure 3 1Λ is an example of the CD-focus curve of measuring points 1, 1, 1, 17, 33 calculated by precise imaging simulation Figure 31B is an example of predicting the CD-focus curve of the measurement points i, 1 1, 17, and 33 under the same exposure conditions and the same pattern by using the aforementioned prediction method. As shown in Figures 31A and 31, The CD_focus curve simulated by imaging and the CD-focus curve predicted by the above-mentioned prediction method are very consistent at each measurement point, and can be highly accurate Measure the CD-focus curve. That is, if the above-mentioned prediction method is executed, the CD-focus curve can be predicted with high accuracy when the predetermined pattern is transferred under the predetermined exposure conditions. Figure 32 shows the line width deviation △ cd, the relationship between the calculation results using the ZS method described above and the method of directly calculating the spatial aberration by providing an appropriate wavefront aberration. Comparing this Fig. 32 with the above-mentioned Fig. 5 shows that if the new ZS method is used, the error can be reduced particularly. It can also be seen from Fig. 32 that the line width can be accurately calculated by the extended ZS method even if the aerial image is not performed by imaging simulation. In the above description of steps 202 to 301, the explanation is based on the premise that the operator or the like is used, but only the designation of the operator and the like is performed (step 202), and the processing after step 204 is performed on the computer 46 for simulation. (Or other computers connected to the proposed computer) Of course it can be done all. It is also possible to provide instructions from the host computer instead of the operations of the aforementioned operators. This deformation can be easily achieved by changing the software program. In a computer such as the intended computer 46, a processing program other than the above specified exposure conditions is performed. For example, it can be used on a CD (c0mpact disc), (digital versatile disc), M0 (magneto-optical disc), or 93. 200400540 Sales of information recording media such as FD (flexible disc). a π a Can be used as a steel outlet in the recording state. Of course, transfers are made through electronic content such as the Internet. The line can also be measured digitally (evaluation method). 2 Use the predicted measurement points as described above to measure the points. ^ Gather the lines and apply the evaluation of the exposure device 100. Add the image of the branch tea (or transfer image). ) Special feature 2: 1 As' As mentioned above, on the projection optical system ~ decent side, in
开/…則·點1〜η之位置,假定分別配置孤立線圖案之情 形,右在各量測點,預測CD_聚焦曲線的話,則在各量測 點’根據在CD·聚焦曲線之偏移,能評價曝光領域U内之 孤立線圖案像之特性(例如,面内均勻性)。On / ... then, it is assumed that the positions of points 1 to η are provided with isolated line patterns. If the CD_focus curve is predicted on the right at each measurement point, then at each measurement point, according to the bias in the CD · focus curve. It can evaluate the characteristics of the isolated line pattern image in the exposure area U (for example, the in-plane uniformity).
旦又’如第5圖所示’假設使用標線片^(其係在對應 里測點Kn之位置,配置相互正交之線圖案)之情形,針 對縱線㈣、橫線圖案,分別執行上述之步驟M2〜步驟 3〇1,來預測CD-聚焦曲線的話,則作成前述第8圖所示之 縱線圖案及橫線圖案之CD_聚焦曲線,根冑CD_聚焦曲線 之差,也能評價各量測點之縱橫線寬差。 _、即,求出對縱線與橫線各像之CD(線寬)變化之查涅克 感度,求出像差(查涅克項)組合之交又項之查涅克項感度 S/SmU关j),該符號在縱橫線相異之組合能找出使vh差 受影響之像差(查涅克項)之組合。其理由係用v線與h線 ,因式(25)中之第2項以外係同一值,故在VH差=△ CD(V) △ CD(H)之計异中,關於冷n,在縱線與橫線,當 父又項之查涅克項感度S/5 i,j(i妾j)之符號相異時,線寬差 94 200400540 受影響之故。 又,假設在對應量測點1〜η中,分別配置L/S圖案之 情形,若針對該L/S圖案像兩端之線圖案像,來預測各 CD-聚焦曲線的話,則根據CD-聚焦曲線之差,能評價各 量測點兩端像之線寬差,藉此,例如,能評價投影光學系 統PL之慧形像差。 又,若綜合以上之式(21)、式(22)(或式(24))、式(27) 、式(28),用矩陣形式來表示的話,則如以下之式(29)所示Once again, as shown in Figure 5, suppose that a reticle ^ (which is arranged at a position corresponding to the measurement point Kn and arranged with mutually orthogonal line patterns) is executed for the vertical line ㈣ and the horizontal line pattern, respectively. If the above steps M2 to 3001 are used to predict the CD-focus curve, the CD_focus curve of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern shown in the aforementioned FIG. 8 is prepared, based on the difference of the CD_focus curve, It can evaluate the vertical and horizontal line width difference of each measurement point. _, That is, find the Zanek sensitivity to the change in the CD (line width) of each image of the vertical and horizontal lines, and find the Zanek term sensitivity S / at the intersection of the aberration (Zanek term) combination SmU Guan j), the combination of the symbols in the vertical and horizontal lines can find the combination of aberrations (Chaineck term) that affect the vh difference. The reason for this is to use the v-line and the h-line. Because of the same value except for the second term in equation (25), the difference between VH = △ CD (V) △ CD (H) is different. The vertical and horizontal lines are different when the sign of the parent and child's Zanek term sensitivity S / 5 i, j (i 妾 j) is different, the line width difference 94 200400540 is affected. In addition, suppose that the L / S pattern is arranged in the corresponding measurement points 1 to η. If the CD-focus curve is predicted for the line pattern image at both ends of the L / S pattern image, the CD- The difference in the focus curve can evaluate the difference in line width of the image at both ends of each measurement point, thereby, for example, the coma aberration of the projection optical system PL can be evaluated. In addition, if the above formulas (21), (22) (or (24)), (27), and (28) are combined and expressed in a matrix form, they are shown as the following formula (29)
Sa^ a 33Sa ^ a 33
AA
Sa ^Α,ι 37 "33 A : Wa 0 0 0 0 0 0 7^33 0 Ψβ 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 Ψγ 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 Ψγ 0 0 0 y333 0 0 0 0 Ψγ 0 0 yii 0 0 0 0 0 ws 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ws rhs Η 耶37,37 ^5,1 外5,37 ^3,1 (29)Sa ^ Α, ι 37 " 33 A: Wa 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 ^ 33 0 Ψβ 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 Ψγ 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 Ψγ 0 0 0 y333 0 0 0 Ψγ 0 0 yii 0 0 0 0 0 ws 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ws rhs Η 37 37,37 ^ 5,1 except 5,37 ^ 3,1 (29)
外3,37 ^7ι,ι SYl,37Outside 3,37 ^ 7ι, ι SYl, 37
SdA δ 4 δ 2, 33 '33SdA δ 4 δ 2, 33 '33
Sd, S5 4,37 2,1 S6 2,37 95 62 200400540 式中,W α、W石、W r、w (5係分別表示如下。Sd, S5 4,37 2,1 S6 2,37 95 62 200400540 In the formula, W α, W stone, W r, w (5 series are respectively expressed as follows.
Cl,l …C1Cl, l… C1
Wa = Wy ,37 aiWa = Wy, 37 ai
Wj3 W3 C33,l …C33,37 ς,22 c 1,37 C33,l2 ^33,22 … Cu2 Cl/ … c 1 p 2 3,1 C33,2 c 2 33.37 r 2 ' 1.37 2 33,37 • C'/ C33/ c C ^33,2^33,1 "1,37 "33,37Wj3 W3 C33, l… C33,37 ς, 22 c 1,37 C33, l2 ^ 33,22… Cu2 Cl /… c 1 p 2 3,1 C33,2 c 2 33.37 r 2 '1.37 2 33,37 • C '/ C33 / c C ^ 33,2 ^ 33,1 " 1,37 " 33,37
矩陣係因W沒選擇式(21)或式(24)之任一式而相異者 。又,上述之式(29)能整理如下。 ' f=Wa · ZS (30) 式中,f係CD-聚焦曲線各係數之矩陣,Wa係有關波 面像差之矩陣,ZS係有關查涅克感度之矩陣。 (調整方法) 修 其次,根據藉由上述之CD-聚焦曲線之預測方法所預 測之CD·聚焦曲線,執行評價曝光裝£丨⑼之圖案轉印狀 “之汗仏方法後,根據該評價結果,針對調整圖案轉印狀 況:調整方法加以說明。又,此處,係以提高面内均勻性( 在月j述之v驟1 02中所設定之孤立線圖案像)為目標來進行 調整者。 如刖述’對應各量測點n(n=1〜33)之圖案即使全部均 96 200400540 勻,若各量測點間之CD_聚焦曲線偏離的話,則在該量則 點上成像之圖案像也不均勻。因此,本實施形態之調整/方 法係如上述,所預測之各量測點之CD_聚焦曲線為了儘量 均勻,調整曝光裝置100之圖案轉印狀態。以下,針對該 凋整方法加以說明,首先,根據該調整方法之算出式加以 說明。 為了使各量測點11(n==1〜33)之CD-聚焦曲線均勻化, 較佳係調整前述19個參數,以使前述所求出之、万、 ^ 5η、5 4n、r 3n、5 2n、r ΐη,在各量測點中儘量成為均 勻。此處,使各量測點η(η=1〜33)之α η、召η、7、、占4 7 3 η 5 2 η、γ 1 η之目標值在量測點間同一條件上,曾 出使 α η、/5 n、r 5n、5 4n、r 3n、d 2n、r ln 趨近各目標 值之調整參數之調整量。 如上述,當調整各調整參數時,投影光學系統p L之 波面像差等會變化。若用各矩陣PARA1P,〜pARAi9p,來 2示量測點n(n=l〜33)之前述19個調整參數(將這些參數 分別當作調整參數PARA1〜PARA19)之每單位調整量之上 迷矩陣Wa之各要素(即,包含^^卜丨〜”^員之變化)的話 ’則例如,PARA 1P,能用下式來表示。 MMIP'The matrix system differs because W does not choose either of equations (21) or (24). The formula (29) can be arranged as follows. 'f = Wa · ZS (30) In the formula, f is the matrix of the coefficients of the CD-focus curve, Wa is the matrix of wavefront aberrations, and ZS is the matrix of Zanek sensitivity. (Adjustment method) Secondly, according to the CD · focus curve predicted by the above-mentioned method of predicting the CD-focus curve, perform the evaluation method of the "transfer pattern" of the exposure equipment, and then use the evaluation result , Regarding the adjustment of the pattern transfer situation: the adjustment method will be explained. Here, the adjustment is aimed at improving the in-plane uniformity (the isolated line pattern image set in v step 10 02 described in the j). For example, even if all the patterns corresponding to each measurement point n (n = 1 ~ 33) are uniform, all of them are uniform. If the CD_focus curve between each measurement point deviates, the image will be imaged at that point. The pattern image is also not uniform. Therefore, the adjustment / method of this embodiment is as described above. In order to make the CD_focus curve of each measurement point as uniform as possible, the pattern transfer state of the exposure device 100 is adjusted. In the following, the This method will be explained first, according to the calculation formula of this adjustment method. In order to make the CD-focus curve of each measurement point 11 (n == 1 ~ 33) uniform, it is better to adjust the aforementioned 19 parameters to So that the above ^ 5η, 5 4n, r 3n, 5 2n, r ΐη, try to be as uniform as possible at each measurement point. Here, α η, η, 7, and η of each measurement point η (η = 1 ~ 33) In the same conditions between the measurement points, the target values of 4 7 3 η 5 2 η and γ 1 η have been used to make α η, / 5 n, r 5n, 5 4n, r 3n, d 2n, r ln tend to The adjustment amount of the adjustment parameters near each target value. As described above, when adjusting each adjustment parameter, the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system p L will change. If each matrix PARA1P, ~ pARAi9p is used to show the measurement point n (n = 1 to 33) of the aforementioned 19 adjustment parameters (taking these parameters as the adjustment parameters PARA1 to PARA19, respectively), each element of the fan matrix Wa above the adjustment amount per unit (that is, including ^^ 卜 丨 ~ "^ The change of the staff) ', for example, PARA 1P can be expressed by the following formula. MMIP '
Wa' 0 0 0 0 0 0 · 0 那, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wyy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ψγ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wyf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WSf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WS} 97 (31) 200400540 示 式中 ,Wa、 W ,、 w r、 • W (5 ’分別能用下式 A, ... 7 ' ^1,37 Wa,= Wy^ ·: ^33,1 ... 7 ^33,37 •V V …及372. 心Zu …Ζπ2· ▼= * ·: ’·· : ·· · β .¾2 w ...z 2 ^ 33,37 ·Ζ33,1 Ζ33,2Ζ33,1 …Ζ33 372 「zu2 V …ZU72· ㈣丨= • • • . .¾2 Z33,22 …Z33,372 ❿ 式中,各矩陣\¥«,、\¥/3,、\¥7,、界(5,之各要素所 包含之Zn,i(i=l〜37)係調整參數PARA1之量測點η之C„,i 之變化。 因此,如下式(32)所示,若在列向量ZS(把上述各係數 之感度當作要素)上,乘上矩陣PARAlPn’的話,就能求出 調整參數PARA 1之每單位量之量測點η之係數變化量(例 如,α η(Ρ1))之列向量B’[l]。 (户1) a (尸1) 33Wa '0 0 0 0 0 0 · 0 that, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wyy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ψγ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wyf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WSf 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WS} 97 (31) 200400540 In the expression, Wa, W,, wr, • W (5 'can use the following formula A, ... 7' ^ 1,37 Wa, = Wy ^ ·: ^ 33 , 1 ... 7 ^ 33,37 • VV… and 372. Heart Zu… Zπ2 · ▼ = * :: '··: ·· β .¾2 w ... z 2 ^ 33,37 · Z33,1 Z33,2Z33,1… Z33 372 「zu2 V… ZU72 · ㈣ 丨 = • • •. .¾2 Z33,22… Z33,372 ❿ In the formula, each matrix \ ¥«, \ ¥ / 3, \ ¥ 7 The Zn, i (i = l ~ 37) contained in each element of the circle (5,) is the change of C ′, i of the measurement point η of the adjustment parameter PARA1. Therefore, as shown in the following formula (32), if By multiplying the matrix vector PARAlPn 'on the column vector ZS (taking the sensitivity of the above coefficients as elements), the coefficient change amount (for example, α η) of the measurement point η per unit amount of the adjustment parameter PARA 1 can be obtained. (P1)) column vector B '[l]. (House 1) a (corpse 1) 33
A (尸1) β3(ρ1) y33 Y51 (尸1) 98 200400540A (corpse 1) β3 (ρ1) y33 Y51 (corpse 1) 98 200400540
5![1] = PARAIP^ZS r5: (P1) r3, 33 (尸1) 7^33 r1! (户1) (尸1) (尸1) 33δ4,(Ρ1) yi W1) (尸1) 02, (32)5! [1] = PARAIP ^ ZS r5: (P1) r3, 33 (corporate 1) 7 ^ 33 r1! (House 1) (corporate 1) (corporal 1) 33δ4, (Ρ1) yi W1) (corporate 1) 02, (32)
W1) 同樣地,針對調整參數PARA2,〜PARA19,,也能求 出每單位量之量測點η之係數變化量之列向量B ’ [2]〜 Β,[19]。 此處,將各調整參數調整量之縱向量當作下式(33)所 示之縱向量Ρ。 ' ADJX "W1) Similarly, for the adjustment parameters PARA2 to PARA19, the column vectors B '[2] to Β, [19] of the coefficient change amount of the measurement point η per unit quantity can also be obtained. Here, the vertical amount of each adjustment parameter adjustment amount is taken as the vertical amount P shown in the following formula (33). 'ADJX "
ADJ2 Ρ= : (33) ADJ\9^ CD-聚焦曲線之係數對調整參數PARA1〜PARA19之 調整量之變化Γ能用下式(34)來表示。 /· = mm [1] + dD/2.5丨[2] + …ma 9 ·万,[19] (34) 此處,係利用調整參數之調整量與與該調整量所帶來 之CD-聚焦曲線之係數之上述關係,進行以下所示之計算 ,來欲圖各量測點圖案之均勻化。即,設CD-聚焦曲線各 99 200400540 係數目標值之列向量為f ,^ ^ 〇 各係數之列向量為f,藉 由刖述之列向! B,『n〜fvn Ω1 > , 曰 之1次結合所形成之矩卩車A B’則這些關係能用下式⑽來表示。 “陣為 ft—f=B· P (35) 若用最小平方法爽經 … 采解上式的話’則成為下式(36)。 Ρ = (Β ·Β)Ί〇 (36) 式中,ΒΤ係前述之矩陣Β之轉 (ΒΤ.Β)之反矩陣。 V ΰ) ir' 這種調整方法係主控制裝置 出調整量之列向量P,算出 34之式(36)’求 ^决 异出㈣1 ADil〜調整量adJ19。 又,為了使用式(36)來求出列向量p,必須 CD-聚焦曲線之各係數 里列』 軚值(即,列向量…但此處, 車父佳係如則述,為了以提高孤立線圖案像之面 目標,針對各量測點之函數” ^ 部設定在相同之值。將各階係數之目標值全 其次,針對調整縱橫線寬差時之㈣方法加以㈣。 广如前述’假定第5圖所示之標線片h之量 勿別配置在對應量測點l〜n之位置之情形,若執行前述 之預測方法的活,則在同一量測點,在 ⑶聚焦曲線。 在各線圖案,能得到 這種情形’也使用與上述之式(36)同樣之式, 整量細〜調整量则9,但如前述,為了在各:測:: 能得到2⑮CD-聚焦曲線,係數矩陣^及f之要素數成為 上述之式(30)之f之要素數(33><7=231)之2倍(即^Μ),、,、 100 200400540 若將對應同-量測點之縱線圖案及橫線圖案係數之目標值 設定同-值的話’則能算出最減低縱橫線寬差之調整量 ADJ1〜調整量ADJ19。 整量其二主=置5〇係依照記憶…所 斤正㈣ Dm,與前述同樣,藉由成像性能 i制15 48調整可動透鏡之位置及方式之至 y 方,與上述之各動作之同時,主_ f ,1 # $ . % μ曰▲ 了王&制裝置50係依照 调整ϊ ADJ19,對光源16賦 波長。 蝌卞扣7,來偏移照明光EL·之 又,在本實施形態中,在 後之狀態下,也可進一步執行=:系、统ρ"之調整 . 订上述之步驟202〜步驟3 10 ,來預測調整後之各量測點之 # > 灰焦曲線,進一步重霜 執仃上述之評價方法及調整 狀態逐漸趨近均句化。 使各!測點圖案之轉印 (曝光方法) 在製造半導體元件時之曝光製程 線片R係裝载在標線以Rs “兀件用之仏 步進掃描式之曝光。又,在本〜…猎由則述之動作,進行 ,當進行+ β 只轭形恶之曝光裝置100中 述曝光領域ΙΑ内之晶圓w 之際’係根據算出前 〜ADJ18,$ > k W / 置及方式之調整量Adj 16 ADJ18,進仃控制係如前述同樣。 又,本實施形態,在藉由曝 之交換使實際轉印之圖案變更日士/、之设定或標線片R U圖、第21圖、第23h 因查埋克感度(包含第 圖、弟25圖〜第28圖所示之各查 101 200400540 涅克項成份之項)變化,故重新求出這些感度,當然必須重 新執行上述之預測方法、評價方法、調整方法。 如以上之詳細說明,若依上述預測方法的話,則根據 複數項之線性結合值(分別包含將投影光學系統pL之波面 像差w(P,0)級數展開所得到之各像差成份cn,i(n==1〜33 ’ 〜37),能求出CD_聚焦曲線(有關透過投影光學系統 PL所投影之圖案像之變動曲線)。因此,不使用需要龐大 =算時間之複雜計算所帶來之成像模擬,#由極單純二運ADJ2 P =: (33) ADJ \ 9 ^ The change of the coefficient of the CD-focus curve to the adjustment amount of the adjustment parameters PARA1 to PARA19 Γ can be expressed by the following formula (34). / · = Mm [1] + dD / 2.5 丨 [2] +… ma 9 · 10,000, [19] (34) Here, the adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter and the CD-focus brought by the adjustment amount are used. The above relationship of the coefficients of the curve is calculated as shown below to make the pattern of each measurement point uniform. That is, let the column vector of each of the 2004-2004-4040 coefficient target values of the CD-focus curve be f, ^ ^ 〇 The column vector of each coefficient is f, by the column direction described above! B, "n ~ fvn Ω1 >", said moment 卩 A A 'formed by the first combination, these relations can be expressed by the following formula ⑽. "The matrix is ft-f = B · P (35) If the least square method is used to solve the problem ... If the above formula is solved, then it becomes the following formula (36). Ρ = (Β · Β) Ί〇 (36) In the formula, ΒΤ is the inverse matrix of the aforementioned matrix B (BT.B). V ΰ) ir 'This adjustment method is to calculate the column vector P of the adjustment amount by the main control device and calculate the formula (34) of 34. Find the difference ㈣1 ADil ~ Adjustment amount adJ19. In addition, in order to use the equation (36) to find the column vector p, the values of the coefficients of the CD-focus curve must be listed. The value (that is, the column vector ... But here, the car parent family As mentioned above, in order to improve the target of the isolated line pattern image, the "^" function of each measurement point is set to the same value. The target values of the coefficients of each order are all next, and the method of adjusting the vertical and horizontal line width difference As described above, 'Assume that the amount of the reticle h shown in Figure 5 should not be placed at the corresponding measurement points l ~ n. If the foregoing prediction method is performed, the same measurement will be performed. Point, the focus curve in ⑶. In each line pattern, this situation can be obtained. The same formula as the above formula (36) is also used, and the integer is fine to adjust The quantity is 9, but as mentioned above, in order to obtain a 2⑮CD-focus curve, the number of elements of the coefficient matrix ^ and f becomes the number of elements of f in the above formula (30) (33 > < 7 = 231 ) 2 times (ie ^ M) ,,, 100 200400540 If the target values of the vertical line pattern and horizontal line pattern coefficient corresponding to the same-measurement point are set to the same value, then the minimum width difference between the vertical and horizontal lines can be calculated. The adjustment amount ADJ1 to ADJ19. The second amount of the adjustment amount is set to 50. It is based on the memory ... Dm is the same as described above. The position and method of the movable lens are adjusted to y by the imaging performance i 48. At the same time as the above-mentioned actions, the master _ f, 1 # $.% Μ said ▲ The king & device 50 is to adjust the wavelength of the light source 16 according to the adjustment ϊ ADJ19. Snap button 7 to offset the lighting Light EL. In this embodiment, in the latter state, the adjustment of =: system, system ρ " can be further performed. Order the above steps 202 to 3 10 to predict the various measurements after adjustment. The point of the > gray-focus curve, further defrost the implementation of the above-mentioned evaluation method and adjustment status gradually approaching homogenization. The transfer of the measuring point pattern (exposure method) The exposure process line sheet R during the manufacture of semiconductor elements is a step-scan type exposure that is mounted on the marking line with Rs "for the components. Also, in this ~ ... hunting According to the actions described above, when performing a + β yoke-shaped exposure apparatus 100, the wafer w in the exposure area IA described above is calculated based on before calculation ~ ADJ18, $ > k W / placement and method The adjustment amount of Adj 16 ADJ18 is the same as that described above. In addition, in this embodiment, the actual transferred pattern is changed by exchanging the settings of the Japanese or Japanese, or the ruling, ruling, 21st, and 23h. As shown in Fig. 25 to Fig. 28, each check 101 200400540 Niek term component) changes, so to re-calculate these sensitivities, of course, it is necessary to re-execute the aforementioned prediction method, evaluation method, and adjustment method. As explained in detail above, if the above prediction method is adopted, then each aberration component cn obtained by expanding the wavefront aberration w (P, 0) series of the projection optical system pL according to the linear combination of the complex terms (respectively) , I (n == 1 ~ 33 '~ 37), can obtain the CD_focus curve (the variation curve of the pattern image projected through the projection optical system PL). Therefore, no complicated calculation that requires huge = calculation time is used The imaging simulation brought by, # 由 极 纯 二 运
异(求出包含各像差成份Cni(n=1〜33,i = 1〜37)項之線性 結合值),在既定曝光條件下,透過既定像差狀態之投影光 學系統PL,能預測有關圖案像之CD_聚焦曲線,根據該預 測結果,能短時間預測圖案之投影像(或轉印像)之特性。、 又,若依該預測方法的話,則根據CEU聚焦曲線之移 動里及包:各像差成份Cni(n==1〜33,i=1〜37)項之線性結 合,也能异出投影光學系統PL之波面像差w(U)所起(Find the linear combination of the terms Cni (n = 1 to 33, i = 1 to 37) of each aberration component). Under a given exposure condition, the projection optical system PL can be used to predict the relevant aberration status. The CD_focus curve of the pattern image can predict the characteristics of the projected image (or transfer image) of the pattern in a short time based on the prediction result. Also, if this prediction method is used, according to the movement of the CEU focus curve, the linear combination of the terms Cni (n == 1 ~ 33, i = 1 ~ 37) of each aberration component can also project the projection. From wavefront aberration w (U) of optical system PL
因之CD-聚焦曲線之變形情況,故能進一步高精度地預測 CD-聚焦曲線。 又,若依該預測方法的話,有關像大小轴方向c線寬變 化方向CD.聚焦曲線之移動不僅在各像差成份之平方 Cn/有感度,並且在彼此相異像差成份彼此之交叉項也有 感度。若進一步考慮這些交又項之線性結合的肖,則能更 高精度地預測像大小軸方向之移動量。 W ,刈衣不1刿點n之變鸯 數之變形情況之差份函數V,夕*s 乂 歎y η之可數階項之係數係在展 102 200400540 投影光學系統PL之波面像差W(p,0)時之各像差成份 Cn,i(n-1〜33,1=1〜37)中,因有感度,故藉由各查涅克項 成份Cn,i之線性結合,能預測差份函數之奇數階項之 係數。又,因差份函數y,n之偶數階項之係數在各查涅克 項成份之平方C^2有感度,故藉由各查涅克項成份之平方 Cn,i2之線性結合,能預測該偶數階項之係數,故能用短時 間且高精度地預測CD-聚焦曲線之變形。 又,若依上述評價方法的話,則使用上述之預測方法 ,在既定曝光條件下,針對投影光學系統PL之有效視野 内之各量測點’能短時間且高精度地預測針對透過投影光 學系統PL所投影之既定圖案像,故根據該cd_聚焦曲線 ’能短時間高精度評價投影光學系統PL之有效視野内之 既疋圖案像之特性(例如,均勻性)。 一又,若依使用該評價方法之調整方法的話,則使用本 實施形態之評價方法,評價投影光學系統PL之有效視野 内之既定圖案像之均勾'& ’根據該評價結果,調整透過投 影光學系、统PL之既定圖案像之形成狀態。因此,根據评Because of the deformation of the CD-focus curve, the CD-focus curve can be predicted with higher accuracy. In addition, according to this prediction method, the direction of the image width axis direction c line width change direction CD. The movement of the focus curve is not only the square Cn / sensitivity of each aberration component, but also the cross terms of the aberration components that are different from each other. There is sensitivity too. If the linear combination of these intersection terms is further considered, the amount of movement in the direction of the image axis can be predicted with higher accuracy. W, the difference function V of the deformation of the variable n number of points n 1, the coefficient of the countable order term y sigh y η is shown in 102 200400540 wavefront aberration W of the projection optical system PL Among the aberration components Cn, i (n-1 ~ 33, 1 = 1 ~ 37) at (p, 0), since there is sensitivity, the linear combination of the components Cn, i of the Zernike terms can Coefficients for predicting odd order terms of the difference function. In addition, because the coefficients of the even-order terms of the difference function y, n have a sensitivity in the square C ^ 2 of the components of each Zanek term, it can be predicted by the linear combination of the squares Cn, i2 of the components of each Zanek term. The coefficients of the even-order terms can predict the deformation of the CD-focus curve in a short time and with high accuracy. In addition, if the above evaluation method is used, the above-mentioned prediction method is used, under a predetermined exposure condition, for each measurement point in the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL, it is possible to predict the transmission optical system in a short time and with high accuracy. The predetermined pattern image projected by the PL, therefore, based on the cd_focus curve, the characteristics (eg, uniformity) of the existing pattern image within the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL can be evaluated with high accuracy in a short time. Furthermore, if the adjustment method using this evaluation method is used, the evaluation method of this embodiment is used to evaluate the uniformity of a predetermined pattern image in the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL '&' According to the evaluation result, the transmission is adjusted Formation state of a predetermined pattern image of the projection optical system and the system PL. Therefore, according to the review
價結果,能將既定圖案像之特性調整到所欲狀態(例 印像之均勻性之方向)。 TAs a result, the characteristics of a predetermined pattern image can be adjusted to a desired state (for example, the direction of the uniformity of the printed image). T
益像^样上Ϊ實施形態之預測方法係假定投影光學系統PL 擇只有偶數階項之10…=曲線之函數,雖選 函數,但本發明係不被限定在此 °°函數之取南階數也可是8次以下,也可是丨2产 以上。無論如何,較佳係《 CD-聚焦曲線之函數為高p; 103 200400540 偶函數。 又,上述實施形態之預測方法,雖把差份函數〆當 作5階函數,但該函數也可是4階以下,也可是6階以上 〇 又,上述實施形態之預測方法係將對應各量測點配置 之里測用標線片之圖案作為縱線圖案及橫線圖案(即,交叉 圖案)各別設置之圖案、或孤立線圖案,但本發明並不限於 此,可以是複數個平行線圖案(L/S圖案),也可以是交叉圖 :或組合平行線圖案之圖案。又,也可不僅包含縱圖案: 橫圖案,也可包含斜向延伸之線圖案。又,當採用[π圖 案時,分別用本實施形態之預測方法來預測該L/s圖案兩 端之線圖案之線寬,用本實施形態之評價方法來評價這些 線寬差(即,線寬異常值)’與本實施形態之調整方法同樣 ,根據該評價結果,在調整圖案像之形成狀態下,在減低 線寬異常值之大小了 ’執行曝光的話’則能進行高精度之 曝光。 又,上述實施形態之評價方法,雖將線圖案面内均句 性、縱橫線寬差、、線寬異常值作為評價項目,但本發明並 不限於此,亦能根據CD-聚焦曲線將能評價之所有項目作 為評價項目。 又’上述實施形態之評價方法,雖針對投影光學系統 PL之有效視野之各量測點,分別用短時間且高精度預測, 在既定曝光條件下,透過投影光學系統pL所投影之既定 圖案像之CD·聚焦曲線’根據該CD•聚焦曲線,㈣評^ 104 200400540 投影光學系統PL《有效視 均勻性)之情形加以 无疋圖案像之特性(例如,The prediction method of the implementation mode of the favorable image is based on the assumption that the projection optical system PL selects a function of only 10 ... = curve of the even order term. Although the function is selected, the present invention is not limited to the south order of the °° function. The number may be less than 8 times, or more than 2 times. In any case, it is better that the function of the CD-focus curve is a high p; 103 200400540 even function. In the prediction method of the above embodiment, although the difference function 〆 is regarded as a 5th order function, the function may be below 4th order or may be above 6th order. Moreover, the prediction method of the above embodiment will correspond to each measurement. The pattern of the reticle for point measurement is used as a pattern of a vertical line pattern and a horizontal line pattern (ie, a cross pattern), or an isolated line pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a plurality of parallel lines The pattern (L / S pattern) can also be a cross pattern: or a pattern combining parallel line patterns. Furthermore, it may include not only a vertical pattern: a horizontal pattern, but also a line pattern extending diagonally. In addition, when the [π pattern is used, the prediction method of this embodiment is used to predict the line widths of the line patterns at both ends of the L / s pattern, and the evaluation method of this embodiment is used to evaluate these line width differences (that is, the line "Wide outlier value" is the same as the adjustment method of this embodiment. According to the evaluation result, in the state where the pattern image is adjusted, the size of the line width outlier value is reduced, and the exposure can be performed with high precision if the "exposure is performed". In addition, although the evaluation method of the above-mentioned embodiment uses the in-sentence pattern, line width difference, and line width abnormal value in the line pattern plane as the evaluation items, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be based on the CD-focus curve. All items evaluated are regarded as evaluation items. Also, the above-mentioned evaluation method of the embodiment, although for each measurement point of the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL, predicts with a short time and high accuracy, the predetermined pattern image projected through the projection optical system pL under the predetermined exposure conditions. "CD · focus curve" Based on the CD · focus curve, comment on the situation of the projection optical system PL "Effective Uniformity of Vision" (2004, 200400540), and add the characteristics of the unpatterned pattern image (for example,
一步能得到有關圖案投影像之資訊之波面像差之資訊,埃 感度對前述投景彡像(其係根據這些資=,也可考慮查沒克 ,在將波面像差級數展開複數個查$克=查淫克多項式 用影響前述投影像特性之任意查相互作 變化,來評價前述圖案像之特性。即使在V種二又項)之 慮查埋克感度對前述投影像(其係習 =相= 特性之任意㈣克項之組二= :::性來評價圖案像之特性,故能更高精度地評價圖案像 又,上述實施形態之評價方 Τ丨貝力凌,係根據使用前述之 (36)所算出之最佳調整量’在主控制裝置5〇之控制下,萨 由成像性能修正控制器48等自動進行調整者,不限定^ 此,也可根據前述調整量,用手動調整投影光學系統之成 像性能等。 又,在上述實施形態之預測方法中,能考慮各種之變 形例。又,上述實施形態,係藉由下述一連串之處理來說 明:根據CD-聚焦曲線之預測方法、用所預測之cd-聚焦 曲線來評價曝光裝置100之圖案轉印狀態之評價方法、根 據該評價結果來調整圖案轉印狀態之調整方法、該調整後 進行曝光之曝光方法;但不必用一連串之處理來進行所有 的方法,本發明之預測方法、評價方法、調整方法係分別 105 200400540 獨立或任意組合來執行去 ,.^ 仃考。持續上述實施形態之預測方法 之後,評價方法、調整方法、瞧 〆 女曝光方法也疋在這些預測方 法之各種變形例之後執杆去 佤矾仃者。又,在上述實施形態之預 方法及其變形例之執行後,^ 、 幻傻,除了能適用上述實施形態之 價方法、調整方法、曝光大、土 +从 上,· 尤方法之外,當然也能適用將上 之各種項目當作評價項目之評價方法、藉由手動之調整方 法、藉由步進重複方式之曝光方法等各種評價方法 方法、曝光方法。 ^ 又’在上述實施形態中’就投影光學系統PL之波面 像差量測所使用之波面像差量測器而言,也可使用全體形 狀具有與晶圓保持器能更換之形狀之波面像差量測器。這In one step, the wavefront aberration information about the information of the pattern projection image can be obtained. The sensitivity is based on the above-mentioned projection scene image (which is based on these data, and you can also consider chamunk, and expand the wavefront aberration series to check $ 克 = Chashenke polynomials uses arbitrary checks that affect the characteristics of the aforementioned projection image to change each other to evaluate the characteristics of the aforementioned pattern image. Even in the case of V type two items, the sensitivity of the test projection to the aforementioned projection image (which is a habit) = 相 = Characteristic of the second group of arbitrary grams == :: to evaluate the characteristics of the pattern image, so that the pattern image can be evaluated with higher accuracy. The evaluation method of the above embodiment is Belin, which is based on the use The optimal adjustment amount calculated in (36) above is not limited to those who automatically adjust by the imaging performance correction controller 48 and the like under the control of the main control device 50. Therefore, it can also be used according to the aforementioned adjustment amount. Manually adjust the imaging performance of the projection optical system, etc. In the prediction method of the above embodiment, various modifications can be considered. In addition, the above embodiment is explained by the following series of processes: according to the CD-focus curve A prediction method, an evaluation method for evaluating the pattern transfer state of the exposure device 100 using the predicted cd-focus curve, an adjustment method for adjusting the pattern transfer state based on the evaluation result, and an exposure method for performing exposure after the adjustment; A series of processes are used to perform all methods. The prediction method, evaluation method, and adjustment method of the present invention are implemented independently or in any combination 105 200400540. ^ Test. After continuing the prediction method of the above embodiment, the evaluation method, The adjustment method and the female exposure method are also implemented after various modifications of these prediction methods. In addition, after the implementation of the pre-method of the above embodiment and its modification, ^, phantom, except Applicable to the above-mentioned embodiment of the price method, adjustment method, exposure, soil + from above, especially the method, of course, can also be applied to the above various items as evaluation items of evaluation methods, manual adjustment methods, Various evaluation methods and exposure methods such as the exposure method using the step-and-repeat method. In 'on the projector used in terms of wavefront aberration measuring optical system PL wavefront aberration measurement, a shape may be used all having a replaceable wafer holder of the shape of the wavefront aberration measuring device, which
種情形,該波面像差量測写★ A 裔也此將日日圓或晶圓保持器搬入 到晶圓台WST上,從晶圓a 攸曰曰w σ WST,使用搬出之搬送系統( 曰曰圓裝載器等),進行自動撕译 料曰门 $订自動搬运。並且,上述實施形態,係 對日日圓台能將波面像差量測裝置 衣1 自由裝卸,也可當作 固乂定設置。此時’也可只將波面像差量测裝置8〇之一部 知设置在晶圓台,將其他部份配置在晶圓台之外部。又, 上述實施形態,係忽視波面像差量 / 1 m 1 風4 不友里列我置80之受光用光 予系統之像差者,但也可考虜該 5 L β波面像差來決定投影光學 糸、、先之波面像差。又,在波面像差旦 及囬彳豕圭之里測中,例如,當使 用前述美國專利第5 978 〇85號等 .^ , 现寺所揭不之量測用標線片 < t月形,例如,也可藉由曝光裝In this case, the wavefront aberration measurement is written. A group also moves the Japanese yen or wafer holder into the wafer table WST. From the wafer a, w σ WST, using the transfer system () Round loader, etc.), to perform automatic tearing of materials, such as door and order. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the wavefront aberration measuring device 1 can be freely attached and detached to the Japanese yen platform, and it can also be fixedly installed. At this time, only one part of the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 may be set on the wafer stage, and the other part may be arranged outside the wafer stage. Moreover, in the above embodiment, the wavefront aberration amount / 1 m 1 wind 4 is ignored. The light receiving light is used by the system as the aberration of the system, but the 5 L β wavefront aberration can also be used to determine the projection. Optical aberration, wavefront aberration. Also, in the wavefront aberration measurement and the measurement of the Ueda Keiuri, for example, when the aforementioned U.S. Patent No. 5 978 〇85 and the like are used, the measurement reticle for measurement is unrevealed by the temple. , For example, by exposing
,t 尤衣置所備有之調準系統ALG 來檢測對晶圓上之光阻層所轉印旦 I# 丹丨^化成里測用圖案潛像之 基準圖案潛像之位置偏離。又,當 田々双列里測用圖案潛像之 106 200400540 情形,也可使用光阻或使用朵并 、 〜"^制7^材料等來作為晶圓等基板 上之感光層。藉由這些方法,z 一 不必透過作業者或服務工程 師,能藉由曝光裝置100全自叙 王目動進行前述之投影光學系統 PL之調整。 又’在上述實施形悲中’係移動投影光學系統pl之 光學元件來調整成像性能者’但不限於此,也可加在該驅 動機構:或取代該機構,例如,使用變更投影光學系統PL 之光學7L件間之氣體壓力之機構’使用將標線片R移動或 傾斜到投影光學系統光軸方向之機構,或變更標線與晶H # 間所配置之平行平面板之光學厚度機構等。但是,上述實 施形態係使用丨9個調整參數者,但該調整參數之數與種 類也可任意,例如,也可不包含晶圓表面(晶圓平台wst) 之驅動量或照明光EL之波長偏移等。 又,上述實施形態,係針對使用掃描曝光裝置來作為 曝光裝置之情形加以說明,但不限於此,例如,也可使用 步進重複型曝光裝置。 就這種情形之曝光裝置之用途而言,並不限於半導體 _ 製造用之曝光裝置,例如,亦能廣泛應用於能將液晶顯示 元件圖案轉印在角型玻璃板之液晶用曝光裝置、電漿顯示 或有機EL等之顯示裝置、攝影元件(Ccd等)、薄膜磁頭 、微機及DNA晶片等之曝光裝置。又,為了製造半導體 元件等之微元件、光曝光裝置、EUV曝光裝置、X線曝光 裝置、及電子線曝光裝置等所使用之標線片或遮光罩,本 發明也能適用在將電路圖案轉印在玻璃基板或矽晶圓等曝 107 200400540 光裝置。 又,上述實施形態之曝光裝置之光源,不限於&雷射 、ArF準分子雷射、KrF準分子雷射等紫外脈衝光源,也 能使用連續光源,例如,使用發出g線(波長為Μ㈣、^ 線(波長為365nm)等之輝線之超高壓水銀燈。並且,也可 使用X線,特別係EUV光等來作為照明光。 又,也可使用用摻铒(或铒與镱之兩者)之光纖放大器 來放大從DFB半導體雷射或光纖雷射所振盪之紅外域、或 可視域之單一波長雷射光,使用非線性光學結晶,波形轉 換為紫外光之高階譜波。又,投影光學㈣之倍率不僅是 縮小系統,而且也可是等倍及放大系統之任一種。又,就 投影光學系統而言,不限於折射系統,也可使用具有反射 光學元件與折射光學元件之反射折射系、、统或只使用反射光 學凡件之反射系統。又,當使用反射折射系統或反射系統 來作為投影光學系統PL時,就前述之可動光學元件而言 ,係變更反射光學元件(凹面鏡或反射鏡等)之位置等,來 凋整投影光學系統之成像特性。又,就照明光而言, 特別是使用Aq雷射光、或EUV光等時,也能將投影光學 系統PL當作全反射系統(只由反射光學元件所構成)。但是 ,當使用Ar,雷射光或EUV光等時,標線片R也能當作反 射型。 又,當製造曝光裝置100等之際,首先,將包含複數 個透鏡元件、反射鏡等光學元件等之照明光學系統i 2當 作單元單體加以組裝,並且,把投影光學系統PL當作單 108 200400540 體加以組裝。又,將由許多機械元件所構成之標線片台系 ‘ 統及晶圓台系統等分別當作單元加以組裝。又,為了發揮 作為各單元之所欲性能’進行光學性調整、機械性調整、 及電氣性調整等。又’當進行該調整之際,特別係能針對 投影光學系統PL,使用上述實施形態所說明之投影光學系 統之調整方法、或透過投影光學系統(包含預測方法及持續 此之評價方法之至少一部份)之圖案像特性之調整方法,進 行調整。 其次,將照明光學系統12與投影光學系統PL等組裝 _ 在曝光裝置本體内,並且,將標線片台系統與晶圓台系統 等安裝在曝光裝置本體内,連接配線及配管。 其次,針對照明光學系統12與投影光學系統pL進一 步進行光學性調整。這是因為安裝在曝光裝置之前及後, 這些光學系統,特別係投影光學系統pL之成像性能微妙 變化之故。本實施形態,係在組裝於該曝光裝置本體後, 進行投影光學系統PL之光學性調整時,將前述之波面像 差量測裝置80安裝在晶圓台WST,與前述同樣的,量測 · 波面像差,將該波面像差之量測結果輸入電腦,用與前述 同樣之步驟,例如,算出各透鏡元件《6自由度方向分別 之调整ΐ ’將$异出結果顯示在該電腦之顯示器上。並且 ,依照該顯示,由技術者(作業者)等調整各透鏡元件。藉 此,確實滿足期望之成像性能之投影光學系統pL之調整 便告完成。X,在該階段,因能判斷不能修正之像差,主 要係高階像差’係自動調整困難之像差,故最好是能再調 109 200400540 整透鏡之安裝等。 須將部份=力上=整無法得到所欲之性能時,則必 系統凡之光學二1…為了易於進行投影光學 在曝光裝置本:& H工,在將投影光學系統pl組裝 本“,使用專用之波面量《置等來量測波 面像差’根據該量測結果,特定需要再加工之光學元件之 有無及位置等,也可將該光學元件之再 件之再調整同時進行。 他尤子几The alignment system ALG provided by Youyizhi detects the position deviation of the reference pattern latent image of the pattern latent image transferred to the photoresist layer on the wafer. In addition, when the pattern of the latent image of the field test in double row is 106 200400540, a photoresist or the use of a dopant, a 7 ^ material, etc. can be used as a photosensitive layer on a substrate such as a wafer. With these methods, z- can perform the aforementioned adjustment of the projection optical system PL without the need for an operator or a service engineer through the exposure device 100 full self-reporting Wang Mudong. Also, in the aforementioned embodiment, “the optical element of the projection optical system pl is moved to adjust the imaging performance”, but it is not limited to this, and it can also be added to the driving mechanism: or instead of this mechanism, for example, the projection optical system PL is changed The mechanism of the gas pressure between the optical 7L pieces uses a mechanism that moves or tilts the reticle R to the optical axis direction of the projection optical system, or changes the optical thickness mechanism of the parallel plane plate arranged between the reticle and the crystal H # . However, the above embodiment uses 9 adjustment parameters, but the number and type of the adjustment parameters may be arbitrary, for example, the driving amount of the wafer surface (wafer platform wst) or the wavelength deviation of the illumination light EL may not be included. Shift etc. In addition, the above-mentioned embodiment has been described in the case of using a scanning exposure device as the exposure device, but is not limited to this. For example, a step-and-repeat type exposure device may be used. The application of the exposure device in this case is not limited to an exposure device for semiconductor manufacturing, for example, it can also be widely used in liquid crystal exposure devices that can transfer a pattern of a liquid crystal display element to an angular glass plate, and Display devices such as paste display or organic EL, exposure devices for photographic elements (Ccd, etc.), thin film magnetic heads, microcomputers, and DNA wafers. In addition, in order to manufacture micro-elements such as semiconductor elements, light exposure devices, EUV exposure devices, X-ray exposure devices, and electron line exposure devices, the present invention can also be applied to converting circuit patterns. Printed on glass substrates or silicon wafers and other exposure equipment. In addition, the light source of the exposure apparatus of the above embodiment is not limited to ultraviolet pulse light sources such as & laser, ArF excimer laser, KrF excimer laser, and a continuous light source can also be used. Ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps with radiant rays such as X-rays (wavelength: 365 nm). X-rays, especially EUV light, can also be used as the illumination light. Also, erbium-doped (or both europium and europium) can also be used. ) Fiber amplifier to amplify single-wavelength laser light in the infrared or visible range oscillated from DFB semiconductor laser or fiber laser, using nonlinear optical crystallization, the waveform is converted into high-order spectral waves of ultraviolet light. Also, projection optics The magnification ratio is not only a reduction system but also an equal magnification system and an enlargement system. Moreover, as far as the projection optical system is concerned, it is not limited to the refractive system, and a reflective refractive system having reflective optical elements and refractive optical elements, , Or the reflection system using only reflective optics. Also, when a reflective refraction system or a reflection system is used as the projection optical system PL, the aforementioned movable optics In terms of equipment, the position of reflective optical elements (concave mirrors, reflectors, etc.) is changed to adjust the imaging characteristics of the projection optical system. In terms of illumination light, especially when using Aq laser light or EUV light, etc. It is also possible to use the projection optical system PL as a total reflection system (consisting only of reflective optical elements). However, when using Ar, laser light, or EUV light, the reticle R can also be used as a reflection type. Also, When manufacturing the exposure device 100, etc., first, an illumination optical system i 2 including a plurality of lens elements, mirrors, and other optical elements is assembled as a single unit, and the projection optical system PL is regarded as a single 108 200400540. The system is composed of a reticle stage system and a wafer stage system made up of many mechanical components, and is assembled as a unit. In addition, optical performance is adjusted in order to achieve the desired performance of each unit. Mechanical adjustments, electrical adjustments, etc. When performing this adjustment, the projection optical system described in the above embodiment can be used for the projection optical system PL. The adjustment method, or the adjustment method of the pattern image characteristics of the projection optical system (including at least a part of the prediction method and the continuous evaluation method), is used for adjustment. Next, the illumination optical system 12 and the projection optical system PL are assembled. In the exposure apparatus main body, a reticle stage system and a wafer stage system are installed in the exposure apparatus main body to connect wiring and piping. Next, the illumination optical system 12 and the projection optical system pL are further optically adjusted. This is because these optical systems, especially the projection optical system pL, have subtle changes in imaging performance before and after being mounted on the exposure device. In this embodiment, the optical system of the projection optical system PL is performed after being assembled in the exposure device body. During the adjustment, the aforementioned wavefront aberration measurement device 80 is mounted on the wafer stage WST. The wavefront aberration is measured and measured in the same manner as described above, and the measurement result of the wavefront aberration is input to a computer. Steps, for example, calculate each lens element's 6-degree-of-freedom-direction adjustment ΐ 'to display the result of On the display. In accordance with this display, each lens element is adjusted by a technician (operator) or the like. With this, the adjustment of the projection optical system pL that does meet the desired imaging performance is completed. X. At this stage, because the aberrations that cannot be corrected can be judged, mainly high-order aberrations' are aberrations that are difficult to adjust automatically, so it is best to readjust the installation of the whole lens. If you can't get the performance you want, you must set up the optical two 1 ... In order to facilitate the projection optics in the exposure device: & H, the assembly of the projection optical system pl " Measure the wavefront aberrations using the dedicated wavefront volume "Setting etc." According to the measurement results, the presence and location of the optical element that needs to be reprocessed, etc., can also be adjusted at the same time. He Yuji
/然後’進—步進行綜合調整(電氣調整、動作確認等) 藉此此製造本實施形態之曝光裝置10等曝光裝置, "亥曝光政置能使用高精度調整光學特性之投影光學系統PL ,將標線片R之圖案高精度地轉印在晶圓w上。又,曝 光裝置之製造較佳係在溫度及潔淨度等受控制之潔淨室來 進行。 (元件製造方法) 其次,針對微影製程使用上述曝光裝置之元件製造方 法加以說明。 第33圖係表示元件(IC或LSI等半導體晶片、液晶面 板、CCD、薄膜磁頭、微機器等)製造例之流程圖。如第 33圖所示,首先,在步驟4〇1 (設計步驟)中,進行元件之 功能及性能設計(例如,半導體元件之電路設計等),進行 用來實現該功能之圖案設計。其次,在步驟4〇2(遮光罩製 作步驟)中,製作形成所設計之電路圖案之遮光罩。另一方 面,在步驟403(晶圓製造步驟)中,使用矽晶等材料,來 110 200400540 製造晶圓 〇 〜牛Γ1,在步驟404(晶圓處理步驟)中,係使用步驟价 ㈣、403戶斤準備之遮光罩與晶圓,如後述,藉由微支 術專,將實際電路形成在晶圓上。其次,在步驟 組裝步驟)中,使用步驟404所處理之晶圓,進行元件&且壯 。在該步驟405中,視需要,包含切割製程、接 ^ 及封裝製程(晶片密封)等製程。 Χ壬 —最後,在步驟4〇6(檢查步‘驟)中,進行步驟4〇5所/ Then, further advance the comprehensive adjustment (electrical adjustment, operation confirmation, etc.), thereby making the exposure device such as the exposure device 10 of this embodiment, " The exposure exposure system can use the projection optical system PL which can adjust the optical characteristics with high precision , The pattern of the reticle R is accurately transferred on the wafer w. The manufacturing of the exposure device is preferably performed in a clean room with controlled temperature and cleanliness. (Element manufacturing method) Next, a component manufacturing method using the above-mentioned exposure apparatus for a lithography process will be described. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of manufacturing an element (a semiconductor wafer such as an IC or an LSI, a liquid crystal panel, a CCD, a thin film magnetic head, a microcomputer, etc.). As shown in FIG. 33, first, in step 401 (design step), the function and performance design of the device (for example, circuit design of a semiconductor device, etc.) is performed, and a pattern design for realizing the function is performed. Next, in step 402 (the step of manufacturing a light-shielding cover), a light-shielding cover is formed to form the designed circuit pattern. On the other hand, in step 403 (wafer manufacturing step), a material such as a silicon crystal is used to manufacture a wafer 0 to 200400540. In step 404 (wafer processing step), a step price of 403, 403 is used. The hood and wafer prepared by the householder will be described later. The actual circuit is formed on the wafer by micro-branch surgery. Secondly, in the step assembly step), the wafer processed in step 404 is used to perform the component & In step 405, if necessary, processes such as a dicing process, a bonding process, and a packaging process (wafer sealing) are included. AXON — Finally, in step 406 (check step ‘step’), perform step 405.
之疋件之動作確認試驗、耐久性試驗等檢查。經過該穿』 後,元件便告完成,將元件出貨。 Μ衣王 。第34圖係表示半導體元件中之上述㈣4〇4之詳細流 程例。第34圖中,在步驟411(氧化步驟)中,使晶圓之2 面氧化。在㈣412(CVD㈣)中,在晶圓表面形成絕緣 膜。在步驟413(電極形成步驟)中,藉由蒸鍍將電極形成 在晶圓上。在步驟4丨4(離子植入步驟)中,將離子植入到 晶圓。以上之各步驟411〜步驟414係構成晶圓處理各階Check the operation confirmation test and durability test of each component. After the wearing, the components are completed and the components are shipped. King of clothing M. Fig. 34 shows a detailed flow example of the above-mentioned ㈣4 in a semiconductor device. In Fig. 34, in step 411 (oxidation step), both sides of the wafer are oxidized. In ㈣412 (CVD㈣), an insulating film is formed on the wafer surface. In step 413 (electrode formation step), electrodes are formed on the wafer by vapor deposition. In steps 4 and 4 (ion implantation step), ions are implanted into the wafer. Each of the above steps 411 to 414 constitutes each stage of wafer processing
段之前處理製程,在各階段,視需要之處理,選擇性地: 行0 在晶圓製程之各階段,若上述之前處理製程完成的話 ,則如以下所述,執行後處理製程。在該後處理製程中, 首先,在步驟41 5(光阻形成步驟)中,將感光劑塗布在晶 圓上。其次,在步驟416(曝光步驟)中,藉由上述所說明 之曝光裝置及曝光方法,將遮光罩之電路圖案轉印在晶圓 上。其次,在步驟417(顯影步驟)中,將曝光之晶圓顯影 111 200400540 ’在步驟41 8(蝕刻步驟)中,蕻由 ’ 猎甶I虫刻來除去光阻殘留 份以外部份之露出構件。又,卢本獅 ^ 出構j牛又,在步驟419(光阻除去步驟 中,將蝕刻完成不要之光阻除去。 重複這些前處理製程與後處理製程,藉此在晶圓上形 成多重電路圖案。 / 若使用以上所说明之本貫施形態之元件製造方法的話 ,則在曝光製程(步•驟416)中,因使用上述實施形態之曝 光裝置’ &能實現有效減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印像 彼此之線寬差、或孤立圖案之線寬均勻性之良好曝光。因 此,能提高最終製品(元件)之良率,且能提高該生產性。 如以上之說明,本發明之投影光學系統之調整方法係 適用於相互正交之線圖案像之投影所使用之投影光學系統 之凋整。又,本發明之預測方法及程式係適用於預測透過 才又衫光學系統之圖案像之特性。又,本發明之評價方法係 適用於5平彳貝透過投影光學系統之圖案像之特性。本發明之 5周整方法係適用於調整透過投影光學系統之圖案像之形成 狀悲。又’本發明之曝光方法及曝光裝置係適用於將圖案 轉印在物體上。又’本發明之元件製造方法係適用於元件 之生產。 【圖式簡單說明】 (一)圖式部分 第1圖’係概略表示本發明之一實施形態之曝光裝置 構成圖。 112 200400540 第2圖,係表示 圃 之波面像差量測裝置之截面 圖 第3A圖,係表示光學系統中不存在像差時 鏡陣列射出光束之圖 第3B圖,係表示光學系統中 T仔在像差時,從微透| 陣列射出光束之圖。 之線係表示以調整正交2軸方向之線圖案像❼丨 之線寬差為目的之投影光學系統PL之調整方法g 〇Before the segment processing process, in each stage, as needed, optionally: Row 0 In each stage of the wafer process, if the above-mentioned pre-processing process is completed, the post-processing process is performed as described below. In this post-processing process, first, in step 415 (photoresist formation step), a photosensitizer is coated on the wafer. Next, in step 416 (exposure step), the circuit pattern of the hood is transferred onto the wafer by the exposure apparatus and exposure method described above. Next, in step 417 (developing step), the exposed wafer is developed 111 200400540 'In step 41 8 (etching step), the exposed members other than the photoresist residue are removed by the hunting worm I etch. . In addition, in the step 419 (photoresist removal step), the unnecessary photoresist is removed by repeating the pre-processing process and the post-processing process, thereby forming multiple circuits on the wafer. / If the device manufacturing method of the conventional embodiment described above is used, in the exposure process (step • step 416), the use of the exposure apparatus of the embodiment described above can effectively reduce the vertical line pattern and The horizontal line pattern transfer image has good line width difference between each other or isolated pattern line width uniformity. Therefore, the yield of the final product (element) can be improved, and the productivity can be improved. As explained above, The adjustment method of the projection optical system of the present invention is suitable for the adjustment of the projection optical system used for the projection of mutually orthogonal line pattern images. Furthermore, the prediction method and program of the present invention are suitable for predicting the transmission optical system The characteristics of the pattern image. In addition, the evaluation method of the present invention is suitable for the characteristics of the pattern image of a 5 flat ray through a projection optical system. The 5-week correction method of the present invention is suitable for adjustment The formation of the pattern image of the over-projection optical system is sad. 'The exposure method and exposure device of the present invention are suitable for transferring a pattern onto an object. Also, the method of manufacturing a component of the present invention is suitable for the production of a component. [Figure Brief description of the formula] (1) The first part of the drawing part is a schematic view showing the structure of an exposure device according to an embodiment of the present invention. 112 200400540 FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a wavefront aberration measuring device of a garden. Figure 3B shows the beam emitted from the mirror array when there is no aberration in the optical system. Figure 3B is a diagram showing the beam emitted from the micro-transparent | array during the aberration in the optical system. Method for adjusting the projection optical system PL for the purpose of line pattern image of orthogonal 2 axis direction ❼ 丨 the line width difference g 〇
弟5圖,係從圖案面側來看量測用標線片之平面圖。 第6A〜6F ® ’係根據將投影光學系統之波面㈣ 二:查>里克多項式之第9項與第12項之值變化,用來言 明光瞳面之波面錯亂方式之圖。 第7A〜7F W,係根據將投影光學系統之波面像差名 開之查淫克多項式之第4項與第5項之值變化,用來說, 光瞳面之波面錯亂方式之圖。Figure 5 is a plan view of the reticle for measurement viewed from the pattern surface side. Numbers 6A to 6F ® ′ are diagrams illustrating the wavefront disorder method of the pupil surface based on the changes in the values of the 9th and 12th terms of the Rick polynomial. Numbers 7A to 7F W are changes in the values of the 4th and 5th terms of the Chalkian polynomial based on the wavefront aberration name of the projection optical system. For example, the diagram of the wavefront disorder method of the pupil surface.
^第8圖,係用來說明對應縱線圖案與橫線圖案之最佳 聚焦位置之差,產生縱線圖案像(V)與橫線圖案像(H)之線 寬差情況之CD-聚焦線圖。 、 第9圖,係表示使用波長為以&允㈤之KrF雷射作為 光源’照明ρ =〇·75之2/3 #帶照明條件,投影光學系統 PL之數值孔徑(ΝΑ) = 0·68時,轉印量測用標線片上之圖宰 所得^到之光阻像之線寬量測之結果所得到之縱橫線之線2 差(實驗結果)之一例圖。 113 200400540^ Figure 8 is a CD-focus used to explain the difference between the optimal focus position of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern, resulting in the line width difference between the vertical line pattern image (V) and the horizontal line pattern image (H). line graph. Fig. 9 shows the use of a wavelength of KrF laser with & Yun's as the light source 'illumination ρ = 0.75 · 2/3 # with lighting conditions, the numerical aperture (NL) of the projection optical system PL = 0 · At 680 hours, an example of the line-to-line difference (experimental result) of the vertical and horizontal lines obtained from the measurement of the line width of the photoresist image obtained from the graph on the reticle for transfer measurement. 113 200400540
40m又之部份(上2段之部份)圖。 zi2 = 40m λ、20m λ ~ 20m X ^ —40m part (part of the previous two paragraphs) diagram. zi2 = 40m λ, 20m λ ~ 20m X ^ —
義之圖。Righteousness.
,藉由模擬所求出之像 圖之各等高線圖意 第14圖,係表示有關線寬偏差△ CD之zs(Zernike φ Sensitivity)之計算結果一例之圖。 第15圖,係表示有關線寬偏差△ cd,使用習知zs法 之計算結果與使用空間像之計算結果之關係圖。 第1 6圖’係表示一實施形態之預測方法之流程圖(其 第1 7 A圖,係表示} 〇階函數之一例圖,第丨7B圖係 表示該調整誤差一例之圖。 苐1 8圖’係表示查淫克感度s a i之一例圖。 第19圖,係表示—5〇111入〜一5〇111入,用1〇111入間距 來計算11點聚焦方向之移動量,使用最小平方法,來計 算直線斜率之計算結果之一例圖。 第20圖,係表示在用與第19圖之情形同樣之像計算 所得到之11點之線寬變化量之計算結果中,假定二階函 數,使用最小平方法之近似結果一例之圖。 第2 1圖,係表示查涅克感度S冷i之一例圖。 114 200400540 第22A圖,係表示z6與Z13之串訊圖,第22B圖係表 示Z9與Z12之串訊圖。 第23圖,係表示各交叉項感度之一例圖。 弟2 4圖’係表示一實施形態之預測方法之k程圖(其 2)。 第25圖,係表示查涅克項之感度s r 5i之感度例圖。 第26圖,係表示查涅克項之感度s r 3i之感度例圖。 第27圖,係表示查涅克項之感度s 7 π之感度例圖。The contour diagrams of the image maps obtained by simulation. Figure 14 is a diagram showing an example of the calculation result of the zs (Zernike φ Sensitivity) of the line width deviation △ CD. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing the relationship between the calculation result using the conventional zs method and the calculation result using the aerial image regarding the line width deviation Δcd. Fig. 16 'is a flowchart showing a prediction method according to an embodiment (its Fig. 17A is an example of a} order function, and Fig. 7B is an example of the adjustment error. 苐 1 8 Figure 'shows an example of the sensation sensitivity sai. Figure 19 shows -50111 入 ~ 5〇111 入, using the distance of 10111 入 to calculate the amount of movement in the 11-point focus direction, using the minimum level Method to calculate an example of the calculation result of the straight line slope. Figure 20 shows the calculation result of the 11-point line width change using the same image calculation as in the case of Figure 19, assuming a second-order function, An example of the approximate result using the least square method. Fig. 21 is an example of the Zernike sensitivity S cold i. 114 200400540 Fig. 22A is a crosstalk diagram of z6 and Z13, and Fig. 22B is a diagram Crosstalk diagram of Z9 and Z12. Fig. 23 is an example of the sensitivity of each cross term. Fig. 2 4 'is a k-path diagram (part 2) showing a prediction method of an embodiment. Fig. 25 is a diagram showing An example of the sensitivity of the Zernike term sr 5i. Figure 26 shows the Zernike term. An example of the sensitivity of the sensitivity s r 3i. Fig. 27 is an example of the sensitivity of the s 7 π of the Zernike term.
第28圖’係表示查淫克項之感度s 5 4i之感度例圖。 第29圖,係表示查涅克項之感度s 5 2i之感度例圖。 第30圖,係表示求出CD-聚焦曲線y,,k、y’’k+1時之動 作的示意圖。 第31A圖,係表示藉由精密之成像模擬來算出代表性 之量測點之CD-聚焦曲線之一例圖,第31B圖係表示藉由 本發明之一實施形態之預測方法所預測之同一曝光條件、 用同一圖案之代表性之量測點之CD_聚焦曲線之一例圖。Fig. 28 'is a graph showing an example of the sensitivity s 5 4i of the search term. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the sensitivity s 5 2i of the Zernike term. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing the operation when the CD-focus curve y ,, k, y''k + 1 is obtained. Figure 31A is an example of a CD-focus curve representing a representative measurement point by precise imaging simulation. Figure 31B is the same exposure condition predicted by a prediction method according to an embodiment of the present invention An example of the CD_focus curve of a representative measurement point with the same pattern.
第32圖,係表示在線寬偏差中,關於△ cd,使用新 的ZS法之計算結果與空間像之計算結果之關係圖。 第33圖,係表示用來說明本發明之元件製造方法之實 施形態之流程圖。 κ 弟34圖,係表示第33圖之步驟2〇4之詳細流程圖。 (二)元件代表符號 EL 通1 曝光用照明光Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the calculation result of the new ZS method and the calculation result of the aerial image regarding Δ cd in the line width deviation. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing an embodiment of a method for manufacturing a device according to the present invention. Figure κ34 is a detailed flowchart showing step 204 of Figure 33. (II) Symbols for element EL 1 Illumination light for exposure
IAR 照明領域 115 200400540 ΙΑ 照射領域(曝光領域) LB 雷射光束 Μ 反射鏡 PL 投影光學系統 R 標線片 RST 標線片台 TS 控制資訊 W 晶圓 WST 晶圓台 11 室 12 照明光學系統 13 折射光學元件 13i〜135 透鏡元件 15 光瞳開口光圈 16 光源 17 光透過窗 20 照度均勻化系統 22 光積分器(複眼透鏡) 24 照明系統開口光圈板 28A 第1中繼透鏡 28A 第2中繼透鏡 30A 固定標線片遮簾 30B 可動標線片遮簾 32 聚光透鏡IAR Illumination area 115 200400540 ΙΑ Illumination area (exposure area) LB Laser beam M Reflector PL Projection optical system R Graticule RST Graticule table TS Control information W Wafer WST Wafer table 11 Room 12 Illumination optical system 13 Refraction Optical elements 13i ~ 135 Lens element 15 Pupil aperture diaphragm 16 Light source 17 Light transmission window 20 Illuminance uniformity system 22 Optical integrator (Flying lens) 24 Illumination system aperture diaphragm 28A First relay lens 28A Second relay lens 30A Fixed reticle curtain 30B Moveable reticle curtain 32 Condensing lens
116 42200400540 44 45 46 48 50 54R 54W 60a 60b 80 82 記憶裝置 顯示裝置 輸入裝置 模擬用電腦 成像性能修正控制器 主控制裝置 標線片干涉計 晶圓干涉計 照射系統 受光系統 波面像差量測裝置 框體 82a 圓形之開口 84 受光光學系統 84a 物鏡 84b 中繼透鏡 84c 彎曲反射鏡 84d 準直透鏡116 42 200 400 540 44 45 46 48 50 54R 54W 60a 60b 80 82 memory device display device input device computer imaging performance correction controller main control device reticle interferometer wafer interferometer irradiation system light receiving system wavefront aberration measurement device frame Body 82a Circular opening 84 Receiving optical system 84a Objective lens 84b Relay lens 84c Bending mirror 84d Collimator lens
84e 86 88 微透鏡陣列 受光部 玻璃蓋 曝光裝置 117 10084e 86 88 Micro lens array Light receiving section Glass cover Exposure device 117 100
Claims (1)
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2002056116 | 2002-03-01 |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| TW200400540A true TW200400540A (en) | 2004-01-01 |
| TWI253105B TWI253105B (en) | 2006-04-11 |
Family
ID=37565006
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| TW092104373A TWI253105B (en) | 2002-03-01 | 2003-03-03 | Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| TW (1) | TWI253105B (en) |
Cited By (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| TWI418944B (en) * | 2004-07-12 | 2013-12-11 | 尼康股份有限公司 | A method of determining exposure conditions, an exposure method, an exposure apparatus, and an element manufacturing method |
| TWI425376B (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2014-02-01 | Synopsys Inc | Method and apparatus for determining a process model that models the impact of car/peb on the resist profile |
| TWI452438B (en) * | 2007-09-14 | 2014-09-11 | 尼康股份有限公司 | An illumination optical system, an exposure apparatus, an optical element, a manufacturing method thereof, and an element manufacturing method |
| US9057877B2 (en) | 2007-10-24 | 2015-06-16 | Nikon Corporation | Optical unit, illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method |
Families Citing this family (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| TWI639886B (en) * | 2017-10-23 | 2018-11-01 | Powerchip Technology Corporation | Method for maintaining reticle stage |
-
2003
- 2003-03-03 TW TW092104373A patent/TWI253105B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
Cited By (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| TWI418944B (en) * | 2004-07-12 | 2013-12-11 | 尼康股份有限公司 | A method of determining exposure conditions, an exposure method, an exposure apparatus, and an element manufacturing method |
| US8654308B2 (en) | 2004-07-12 | 2014-02-18 | Nikon Corporation | Method for determining exposure condition, exposure method, exposure apparatus, and method for manufacturing device |
| TWI425376B (en) * | 2007-05-07 | 2014-02-01 | Synopsys Inc | Method and apparatus for determining a process model that models the impact of car/peb on the resist profile |
| TWI452438B (en) * | 2007-09-14 | 2014-09-11 | 尼康股份有限公司 | An illumination optical system, an exposure apparatus, an optical element, a manufacturing method thereof, and an element manufacturing method |
| US9057963B2 (en) | 2007-09-14 | 2015-06-16 | Nikon Corporation | Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, optical element and manufacturing method thereof, and device manufacturing method |
| US9366970B2 (en) | 2007-09-14 | 2016-06-14 | Nikon Corporation | Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, optical element and manufacturing method thereof, and device manufacturing method |
| US9057877B2 (en) | 2007-10-24 | 2015-06-16 | Nikon Corporation | Optical unit, illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method |
| US9341954B2 (en) | 2007-10-24 | 2016-05-17 | Nikon Corporation | Optical unit, illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method |
| US9857599B2 (en) | 2007-10-24 | 2018-01-02 | Nikon Corporation | Optical unit, illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| TWI253105B (en) | 2006-04-11 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP4352458B2 (en) | Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method and exposure apparatus, exposure apparatus manufacturing method, program, and device manufacturing method | |
| TWI220998B (en) | Exposure method, exposure apparatus and manufacture method of the same | |
| TWI223132B (en) | Image formation state adjustment system, exposing method and exposing device and data recording medium | |
| JP4174660B2 (en) | EXPOSURE METHOD AND APPARATUS, PROGRAM, INFORMATION RECORDING MEDIUM, AND DEVICE MANUFACTURING METHOD | |
| JP5326259B2 (en) | Illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method | |
| TW498408B (en) | Lithographic apparatus, device manufacturing method, and device manufactured thereby | |
| TWI256484B (en) | Method of measuring aberration in an optical imaging system | |
| TWI358746B (en) | Exposure apparatus and device manufacturing method | |
| TWI257524B (en) | A method for determining parameters for lithographic projection, a computer system and computer program therefor, a method of manufacturing a device and a device manufactured thereby | |
| JP2003092253A (en) | Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and microdevice manufacturing method | |
| KR20050121728A (en) | Pattern decision method and system, mask manufacturing method, focusing performance adjusting method, exposure method and device, program, and information recording medium | |
| TW201104366A (en) | Optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, exposure method, and method for producing device | |
| JP4753009B2 (en) | Measuring method, exposure method, and exposure apparatus | |
| TW201022855A (en) | Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus and device manufacturing method | |
| TW200528932A (en) | Lithographic apparatus and device manufacturing method | |
| TW200400540A (en) | Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method | |
| JP2002319539A (en) | Specification determination method and computer system | |
| JP4147574B2 (en) | Wavefront aberration measurement method, projection optical system adjustment method and exposure method, and exposure apparatus manufacturing method | |
| JP2011221312A (en) | Focus test mask, focus measurement method and exposure apparatus | |
| JP4793683B2 (en) | Calculation method, adjustment method, exposure method, image forming state adjustment system, and exposure apparatus | |
| JPWO2004066371A1 (en) | Exposure equipment | |
| JP2004311742A (en) | Optical system adjustment method, illumination optical device, exposure apparatus, and exposure method | |
| JP2006279028A (en) | Aberration measurement method and apparatus, exposure method and apparatus, and projection optical system adjustment method | |
| JP2005158829A (en) | Wavefront aberration measuring method and apparatus, and exposure apparatus | |
| JP2005079470A (en) | Method for adjusting illumination optical system, exposure apparatus and method, and device manufacturing method |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| MM4A | Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees |